HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 3308 - Contract - Daniel Ortega Construction - Expansion & Renovations, Animal Control - 02_08_1990Resolution # 3308
February 8, 1990
Item #30
BID #1O496
HW : j s
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by
and between the City of Lubbock and Daniel Ortega Construction Company, Inc.
for Animal Control Center expansion and renovations, attached herewith, which
shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the min-
utes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if
fully copied herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this
ATTEST:
to Boyd, City Secr
APPROVED TO CONTENT:
G ne Eads, urchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
�4� I)C4�1
arold Willard, Assistant City
Attorney
8th day of February , 1990.
B. C. McMINN, MAYOR
33og
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER ONE
BID NUMBER 10496
TO: Daniel Ortega Construction Co.
5147 69th Street, Suite D
Lubbock, Texas 79424
Original Amount of Contract
Amount Previous Change Orders
Net Amount this Change Order
Amended Amount of Contract
Percentage Change of Contract Price is
Additional Time of Completion is 0 days
The Date of Substantial Completion
as of this Change Order is July 31, 1990.
to
$91,523.00
0
$903.40
$ 92,426.40
WHEREAS, it is desirable to make changes in the plans and
specifications for this project.
THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED: The contractor to furnish all labor and
material to install additional ceiling, flooring, and electrical.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set
their hands this the 31st day of July 1990.
CONTRACTOR:
Daniel Ortega Const . Co.
By,�^�. .
TITLE %%%C.E- ?RE$11,ENT
Attest:
9LI 2=
Secretary -
OWNER:
City Of Lubbock
BY: ZPt s_
Deputy City Manager
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT
D' A'—
of,/Building Services
R -33 a�
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
P.A.W.S./ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS
BID # 10496
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
1 e� tie,
MAILED TO VENDOR: 1-9-90
CLOSE: 1-19-90; 2:00 p.m.
BID # 10496
ADDENDUM # 1
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING:
1. Delete any and all references to the standing seam roof indicated on
plans or specifications; provide exposed fasteners, R type panel as
specified.
;TLNK YO ,
CITY OF L#OCK
PURCHASING OFFICE
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID
MAILED TO VENDOR: 1-16-90
CLOSE: 1-19-90; 2:00 p.m.
BID # 10496
ADDENDUM # 2
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING:
1. Please replace Bid Proposal sheet with revised Bid Proposal
sheet.
2. Please add Alternate #6 per attached sheet.
TH K Y U,
CITY OF BOCK
PURCHASING OFFICE
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS
for
TITLE: P.A.W.S/ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS
ADDRESS: 401 NORTH ASH
BID NUMBER: 10496
PROJECT NUMBER: 1491-552101-9525
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department
-1-
(This page left blank intentionally)
0
INDEX
PAGE
1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS..........................................................................................3
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................4
3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS.................................................................10
4. PAYMENT BOND..............................................................................................13
5. PERFORMANCE BOND..........................................................................................16
6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE..................................................................................19
7. CONTRACT..................................................................................................21
8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.......................................................................23
9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS...............................................................................41
10. SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................42
11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS........................................................................................43
12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE......................................................................................45
-2-
(This page left blank intentionally)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
-3-
(This page left blank intentionally)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID # 10496
Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be
received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until
2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of January, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all
planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following
described project:
P-
P.A.N.S./ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened
by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene
Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City Council will consider the bids on the 8th day of February, 1990, at Municipal Bldg.,
Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or
all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond
and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the
total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should
be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is
a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price
does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a
cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a
reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less
than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and
execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself
regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that
all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted.
The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of
the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of
Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is
further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained
therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as
heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant
to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to
submit bids in response to this invitation and wilt not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,
color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a pre -bid conference on 9th day of January. 1990, at 10:00 o1clock a.m., Committee
Room #103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
L
Bn Gfene Eads, C.P.M.
Purchasing Manager
a.,
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BID # 10496
Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be
received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock,
Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of January, 1990, or as changed by the issuance of
formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the
construction of the following described project:
P.A.W.S/ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened
by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud.
The planS4 specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of
the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per
Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of
Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's
Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock.
r�
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant
to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to
submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,
color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a prebid conference on 9th day of January. 1990, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Committee Room
103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street.
BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M.
.� PURCHASING MANAGER
(This page left blank intentionally)
--
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
-4-
(This page left blank intentionally)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following:
P.A.W.S and animal control center additions located at 401 North Ash.
Each contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary
to complete this project in accordance with contract documents.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen-
eral Conditions.
n..
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents
for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work
contemplated by said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project
covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a
bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as
noted in the Notice to Bidders.
4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
'— The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY)
calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the
successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however,
the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated
by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is
determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub-
mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple-
tion of the project within the time specified.
..a
5. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of
the contract documents.
6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor
to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of
the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims
pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
-5-
7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade
will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail
will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro-
tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of
the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi-
sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum
standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project.
8. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de-
fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a
written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and
pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear
within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship,
at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his
use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di-
rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup-
pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con-
tractor.
10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi-
als, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc-
tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid
for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City re-
serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a
bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions
of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma-
terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
-6-
12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in
such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines,
conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc-
tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fur-
nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How-
ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under-
ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by
this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas,
at Contractor's expense.
13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger
sig-nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work
as may be necessary.
The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and
lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re-
placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barri-
cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
14. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor
from the City. In all cases where written permissionA s obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast-
ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost
care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are
currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this
contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or
below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such
notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem
necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times
while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the
name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the
work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
16. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required
in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the
State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written
-7-
notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or
change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga-
tion.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state
that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a
statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less
than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The
bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil
Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there-
under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu-
ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc-
tion work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless
the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent
effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor
must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday
he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The
final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be
made by the Owner's Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done
under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately
commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition
so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without
discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the
site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's
Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name
of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The
affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc-
tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon.
The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of
general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
-8=
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten
dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such
laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set
forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents.
19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in-
creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re-
jected and returned to the bidder without being considered.
20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be
correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes
to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis-
tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the
price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi-
vidual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm,
association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a
member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by
a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal
signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign
proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal
shall be executed in ink.
Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and
endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Proposal for (description of the project).
Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids,
but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol-
lowing:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Proposal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(9) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
(j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to
Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
' incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
-9-
(This page left blank intentionally)
r-.
B10 PROPOSAL
-10-
(This page left blank intentionally)
r—
BID PROPOSAL
BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
PLACE Luseo r_,K . Me XA6
DATE-TANt�ARY 19.19-q0
�. PROJECT N0. 10 49 (Q
Proposal of f,�ANII=L ORTEGA CdNSTgU.CTLotq Co. .TN1C.(hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a P A.W.G. / A to rd A L
41
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to
bidders and all other re-
lated contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all
of the conditions surround-
ing the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to
furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance
with the plans, specifica-
tions and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover
all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of
which this propd§at is'to,be
a part, is as follows:
i <<.",,
BASE BID: -1f1
273-
'rr\C1tLSC•M� �d'[C.�
`�
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE #1: 1 VJ O
($�� , r)
W�;J �k/ Wks
``
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE #2: l q t!td
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE #3: e Q__
(Ces
($
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE #4:_ pnP� I-,Z%CSCy", 1�0
((0_rS
($�_
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE #5:__b *-te. -8 &Adr!e d b�O flans .
($ �',�� •� )
ADDITION ALTERNATE #6: -r�te_e-Mocsc,MGr W"s
($ 3000.E ,
Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a
written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED TWENTY)
consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder
hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sun of $100.00 (One hundred dollars) for each
consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more
fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with in-
struction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
-11-
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in
the bidding. _
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar
days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined
the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees
to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the —
work on which he has bid; as --provided in the contract documents.
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Ce tified Check for
r►o�r 0
Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of r�Ve� ollars (S A
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner s l)qui ated damages in the Livent the proposal is
accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond
(if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said —
proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all con-_
tract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
bA'A%L ORTEGA CONSTWCTI
- Contractor _
BY: GILSE'R. - t� QWNTANE
G EN EQ AL MAw AGE R
BTaier j, " a Corporation)
BOND NO. SBP 12070795
BID OR PROPOSAL BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we
Daniel Ortega Construction Company, Inc.
as PRINCIPAL, (hereinafter called the Principal), and Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company
, a rorporation duly organized under the State of Indiana and authorized to transact
a general surety business in the State of Illinois, as SURETY, (hereinafter called the Surety), are held firmly bound unto:
City of Lubbock
as OBLIGEE, (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the sum equal to 5 % of the accompanying bid of the Principal, not,
however, in excess of SEVEN THOUSAND FIVE HUNDREDANDN0,4100 ------ dollars,
($ 7,500.00 ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety,
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, That, whereas the Principal has submitted or is about to submit to the
Obligee a proposal or bid, dated on or about the date mentioned below, for: (1) the performance of the designated work, or
(2) the furnishing of the specified goods, supplies or products, to -wit:
P. A. W. S. /Animal Control Center Additions
.l
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not legally withdraw said bid within or at the times permitted therefor, but shall
duly make and enter into a written contract with the Obligee, in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid, or any
amendment thereof acceptable to the Principal, within the time permitted therefor after such contract forms are presented to
the Principal for execution, should the Obligee award the Principal the said work or contract, or any part thereof: and if the
Principal shall give bond or bonds for the faithful performance thereof, and/or for payment for labor and materials going
thereinto, as in the specifications or contracts provided: or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay to the Obligee
the damages which the Obligee shall have actually suffered by reason of such failure, not exceeding the penal sum of this
bond, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and virtue.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that no action shall lie, or claim be enforced hereunder, unless the award on the basis of said bid
shall have been made within thirty (30) days after the formal opening of said bid, or within the time specified within the bid
provisions, whichever time shall be greater, and unless the Ob!igee hereunder shall give notice to Surety of said award at the
time of notification to the Principal; and unless legal action to enforce any claim hereunder shall have been commenced
within six (6) months from the date of the formal opening of said bid.
PROVIDED, always, that this Bond shall not be valid and binding upon the Surety unless accompanied by a Certified Copy
of a Power of Attorney authorizing the undersigned Attorney -in -Fact to execute such a bond, the Serial Number upon which
Copy of Power of Attorney shall correspond with the Bond Number set out above.
Signed, sealed, and dated this
19th
day of January 19 90
Da iel Ortega Construction Company, Inc.
BY `
Principal
r
BY
Laura Espinoza
Attorney•in•Fact
Indiana
Lumbermens
Mutual Insurance
4.. Company
POWER OF ATTORNEY
PRINCIPAL Daniel Ortega Construction Company, Inc. EFFECTIVE DATE 1-19-90
�- 5147—D2_69th $t (S �L ETY' (CITY) (STATE) 79(Z�PCODE)
CONTRACT AMOUNT $150,000 AMOUNT OF BOND $ 7,500.00
POWER NO.
SBP 12070795
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized and
existing underthe law f the State of Indiana, with its principal office in the City of Indianapolis, Indiana, does hereby make, constitute
and appoint Laura LSpi nozd
State of Te x a s
as its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority herby conferred to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver any
and all Bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof for and on
its behalf as follows:
The obligation of the Company shall not exceed four million ($4,000,000.00) dollars.
And to bind the Corporation thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such Bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contract of
indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof were signed b the President, sealed and duly attested by the Secretary
of the Corporation, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Aftorney(s -in-Fact may do in the premises. This Power of Attorney
is executed and may be revoked pursuant to and by authority granted by �rticle IV, Section 2-A (1) and (2) of the By -Laws of the
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, which reads as follows: _
(1) The President or any Vice President shall have the power and authority, by and with the concurrence with the Secretary of the
Corporation, to appoint Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting to Bonds and undertakings,
recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and at any time to remove any such
Attorney -in -Fact and to revoke the power and authority given to him.
(2) Attorneys -in -Fact when so appointed shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the Powers of
Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Corporation any and all Bonds and undertakings,
recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and such instrument executed by
any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Corporation as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and
attested by the Secretary.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice
President, attested by its Secretary and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed this FIRST day of JUNE 19 89
ATTEST: Indiana LumbermenMtu surance Company
By w BY— �4`G
Secretary Vice President
STATE OF INOIANA COUNTY OF MARION SS:
0
On this FIRST day of JUNE 19 89 before me personally came
the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged the execution of the
above instrument and did depose and say; that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual
Insurance Company; that he knows the seal of said Corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that
it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Corporation; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
M Commission Expires )'Notary Public v
Y P ry
STATE INDIANA SS: �UDiANP'``
COUNT OF MARION
I, the undersigned, Secretary of the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above
and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Indiana Lumbermens Mutual
Insurance Company, which is still in force and effect.
This Certificate may be signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 12th day of June 1973.
"RESOLVED: That the use of printed facsimile of the Corporate Seal of the Company and of the signature of the Secretary on
any certification of the correctness of a copy of an instrument executed by the President or a Vice President pursuant to Article
IV, Section 2-A (1) and (2� of the By -Laws appointing and authorizing Attorney -in -Fact to sign in the name and on behalf of the
Company Bonds and un ertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof
with like effect as if such seal and such signature had been manually affixed and made, hereby is authorized and approved."
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of said Corporation, this 14t h
day of January 19 90
(SEAL)
�.
Form 253
Secretary
PAYMENT BOND
-13-
(This page left blank intentionally)
03/05/90 16:14 FR0FF_S�i0i
STATUT AY PAYMENT BONO PVRSUANT To ARTICLE 5160
OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES Of TEXAS
AS AMENDED BY
ACTS 0 THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION,
1959
BOND CHECK `
BEST RATING
LICENSED IN TEXAS
DATES � By
Dan'el Ortega Construction Co., Inc.
KNOW ALL MEN AY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter tatted the Principat(g), as
Principat(s), and Indiana Lumb rmens Mutual Insurance Company
(hereinafter called the Surcty(s), as Sur y(s), are hold and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter
called the obligee), in the amount of Dollars (fA1- -- _9 1 ) lawful money of
the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselvas,and their heirs, adminis-
trators, executors, successors and assigns Jointly and severally, firmly by these presents,
WHEREAS, the Principal. has enter into a certain written contract with the Obtigee, dated the 8 th day of
Feb. 19 90 to
Bid #10496-P.A.W.S./Ani al Control Center Additions
and said Principal under the law is requir before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a
bond in the amount of said contract which ontract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fulty and to the
same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION Of T IS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay sit claimants
supplying Labor and material to him or a s -contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said con-
tract, then, this obligation shalt be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, NcxJEVER, that this band is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised
Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts f the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all tiabilities on
this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it Were
copied at length herein.
^+ IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the acid Principal (s)
_ St-h day of _March 19SQ.
Principal
By: au�
*By:
eRIES I N ''t'r,
(Title)
XCTtow
By:
(Title)
The undersigned surety company represents 1
ignarF,.verette Abern� Uresident in t
on whom service of proccss may be had in matters ar
Approved as to form:
City of Lubbock P
y:
City Attorney
*4otos If signed by an officer of the Surety Can
showing that this per3on has authority to sign such
of power of attornoy for our files.
1
nd Sw -gly (s) have signed and seated this instrument this
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insuran
Company rill
Surety
i
flat It Is duly quattfied to do business In Texas, and hereby des,
bbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and
my out of such suretyship.
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance
Company
Surety I
*By* /
Laura E�st�lza
Attorney —in —Fact
thrre uwst be on file a certified extract from the ay -laws
bligation. If signed by an Attorney in ►act, we must havd Copy
DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION
In the event the insurer (Surety) is unable tofulfill its contrac-
tual obligation under this policy or contract or application
or certificate or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or
certificateholder is not protected by an insurance guaranty
fund or other solvency protection arrangement.
IP I-E
-15-
Indiana
Lumbermens POWER OF ATTORNEY
mutual lnswance -
f
Company
PRINCIPAL Daniel Ortega Construction Company, IIFFECTIVE DATE 3-5-90
5147-D2'69th St. Lubbock, TX. 79424
(STREET ADDRESS) (CITY) (STATE) (ZIP CODE)
CONTRACT AMOUNT $ 91, 5 2 3 AMOUNT OF BOND $ 91 , 523
POWER No. SBP 120 74393
.. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized and
,. =..existing under the laws of the State of Indiana, with its principal office in the City of Indianapolis, Indiana, does hereby make, constitute
—and appoint Laura Espinnza Texas
State of
as its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, with full power and authority herby conferred to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver any
and all Bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof for and on }
Its behalf as follows.
• f ,.The obligation of the Company shall not exceed four million ($4,000,000.00) dollars. y
And to bind the Corporation thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such Bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contract of
indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof were signed b the President, sealed and duly attested by the Secretary
of the Corporation, hereby ratifyingand confirming all that the said Attorney( may do in the premises. This Power of Attorney
is executed and may be revoked pursuant to and by authority granted by Article IV, Section 2-A (1) and (2) of the By -Laws of the
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, which reads as follows:
(1) The President or any Vice President shall have the power and authority, by and with the concurrence with the Secretary of the
Corporation, to appoint Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting to Bonds and undertakings,
recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and at any time to remove any such
Attorney -in -Fact and to.revoke the power and authority given to him.
(2) Attorneys -in -Fact when so appointed shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the Powers of
Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Corporation any and all Bonds and undertakings,
recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and such instrument executed by
any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Corporation as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and
�.. attested by the Secretary.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice
President, attested by its Secretary and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed this FIRST day of JUNE 19 89
ATTEST: Indiana LumbermenMtu suraance Company
By By4� %
Secretary Vice President
STATE OF INDIANA
COUNTY OF MARION SS:
On this FIRST day of JUNE 19 89 , before me personally came
the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged the execution of the
above instrument and did depose and say; that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual
Insurance Company; that he knows the seal of said Corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that
it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Corporation; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
My Commission Expires ,#.. _ _ ::* Notary Public
^ STATE INDIANA SS
COUNT OF MARION
I, the undersigned, Secretary of the Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above
.., and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Indiana Lumbermens Mutual
Insurance Company, which is still in force and effect.
This Certificate may be signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 12th day of June 1973.
"RESOLVED: That the use of printed facsimile of the Corporate Seal of the Company and of the signature of the Secretary on
any certification of the correctness of a copy of an instrument executed by the President or a Vice President pursuant to Article
IV, Section 2-A (1) and (21 of the By -Laws appointing and authorizing Attorney -in -Fact to sign in the name and on behalf. of the
Company Bonds and unddertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof
with like effect as if such seal and such signature had been manually affixed and made, hereby is authorized and approved.'i
a.. In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of said Corporation, this 5 th
day of March 19 90
r (SEAL) {
Form 253 Secretary
PERFORMANCE BOND
-16-
(This page left blank intentionally)
03/05/90 16 : 15
r—.
STATUTORY PERFORM
OF THE REVISE
ACTS OF THE S6TH i
Daniel Ortega
KNOW ALL MEN 8Y THESE PRESENTS, that „ (h
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), ar,
called the Obligee), in the amount of
United States for the payment whereof, the said Prii
tors, executors, successors and assigns, Jointly an
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a c
..E LQ IQ - , 19g,p to
Bid # 10496-P.A.W.S./An
IF 50N0 PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160
CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS DAf'!
A46NOEO BY
GISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1959
onstruction Co., Inc.
•tinafter called the Principai(s), as Prfneipal(s), and
held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter
Dollars (s_9-..1; ,) lawful money of the
fpat and Surety bind thamsetves, and their heirs, adminlsera-
severally, firmly by these presents.
8th
'twin written contract with the Obligee, dated the _ day of
1 Control Center Additions
and said principal, under the taw is required before ommencing the work provided for in said contract to executj
bond in the amount of void G9ntract which complat ! 6reby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the
same extent as if copied at length herein,
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THiS ORLiGA ION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully per-
form the work in accordance with the plans, specifica ions and contract documents, then this obtigation shall be
void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED. HOWEVER, that this bond is execut pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised
Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56t Legislature, regular session 1999, and atl liabilities an
this bond shalt be determined in accordance with the rovisions of said article to the same extent as if it were
copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal to) a Surety (a) havo signed and seated this instrument this -uh
day of March 19 9 Q
Daniel Ortega Construc,dri' Inc.
Surety
Principat
- Z4Z
(Title)
03/05/90 16:16
PROFESSIONS TODAY 606-7y4-6653 005
The undersigned surety corrpany represents that It is duty qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
4dC31F�„�ette Aberr� teresid nt in Lubbock County to whom any tequisite notices may be delivered and on
whom service of process may be hod in matters arising owl of such suretyship.
Indiana Lumbermens Mutual Insurance
Surety Compan
(Title)
Approved as to Form Laura Espinoza
Attorney —in —Fact
City of Lubbock
By:
City Attorney
•Mete: It signed by an officer of the Su vty Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by -taw*
showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy
of power of attorney for our files.
M.,
DISCLOSURE OF GUARANTY FUND NONPARTICIPATION
In the eve t the insurer (Surety) is unable tofulfill its contrac-
tual oblig tion under this policy or contract or application
or certific to or evidence of coverage, the policyholder or
certificate iolder is not protected by an insurance guaranty -
fund or o her solvency protection arrangement.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
-19-
(This page left blank intentionally)
.z. ..THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY
REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE
LTR
POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION ALL LIMITS IN THOUSANDS
DATE (MM/DDIYY) DATE (MM/DDIYY)
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE ! $ 1 MILL
A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
060 GL 5153707 CCA 5-15-89 5-15-90 PRODUCTS-COMPIOPS AGGREGATE"$ 1 MILL
CLAIMS MADE XXOCCUR.
PERSONAL & ADVERTISING INJURY $ 1 MILL
OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT.
EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1 MILL
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $
MEDICAL EXPENSE (Any one person) $ 5,
;AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED 500
,
ANY AUTO
SINGLE $ s
i LIMIT
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY
A
060 FJ 5153726 CCA 5-15-89 5-15-90 (PerJperson) $
SCHEDULED AUTOS
t....
{ HIRED AUTOS
_,.... _._._ ....
BODILY
ILXNON-OWNED AUTOS
INJURY $
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY
PROPERTY
DAMAGE $
.............
EXCESS LIABILITY
_....."."..."...._ _
EACH " AGGREGATE
OCCURRENCE
{ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
j( WORKER'S COMPENSATION -
. _."_............ _,_.,...,.".....,_. .,.,,,._....,,,,,.
,. .,., .STATUTORY_
THRU AETNA 5-23-89 j 5-23-90 "?�lOO, u —
$ (EACH ACCIDENT)
AND
EMPLOYERS LIABILITY
18 CT 62058 CAA $ ;. 500, (DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT)
(DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE)
_ . $ 100,
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/RESTRICTIONS/SPECIAL ITEMS
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS - CONCRETE -
ADDITION TO ANIMAL SHELTER
CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
City Of Lubbock EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO
Building Inspection/Permit Office MAIL 910 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFIC&TE HOLDER NAMED TO THE
P. 0. BOX 2000 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR
Lubbock, Texas 79457 LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
ATTN: RON SHUFFIELD
' ^ AUTHORIZED
RD 25-S (3188)
_NS�E E Y
CORD CORPORAI
CK
)N 1988
CONTRACT
-21-
(This page left blank intentionally)
1
CONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 8th day of February, 1990, by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Daniel Ortega Construction Co., Inc
of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON-
TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as fol-
tows:
BID # 10496 - P.A.W.S./ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS FOR THE AMOUNT OF $91,523.000
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or
their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence,
Labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with
the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to
make payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
T :---
Secr tart'
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER)
Q �
By:i
MAYOR
Daniel Ortega Const. Co., Inc.
CONTRACTOR
GENERAL
TITLE: / A(44 S R
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
5147 69th Street
Lubbock, Texas 79424
-22-
(This page left blank intentionally)
r-
r..
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
-23-
(This page left blank intentionally)
r-
1. OWNER
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con-
tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
?, 2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall
be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: Daniel Ortega
Construction Co., Inc., who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their
Legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood
as referring to JERRY SMITH, DIRECTOR OF BUILDING SERVICES, BUILDING SERVICES, City of Lubbock, under whose
supervision these contract documents, including the.plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will
inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by
said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for
the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shalt not directly supervise the Contractor or
men acting in behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal,
Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of
the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available
to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed,"
or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
"Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory
to the Owner's Representative.
r-,
Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various
qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na-
ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms,
the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the
fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be
done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the
character of the work.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor
for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. owner shall have no re-
sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
-24-
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent
certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and
all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu-
ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be
of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and
quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or
trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract docu-
ments has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and
shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative
will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor
at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly
Locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense
to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits -to the site to observe the progress of quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu-
ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing
assurances for the Owner that.the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu-
ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents. On the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of
the Contractor.
-25-
r--
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence-
ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by
these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's
.� Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con-
tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre-
sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks,
etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him,
his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa-
tive at Contractor's expense.
'^ 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such
stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and
disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all
cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this
contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and
shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the
part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent
�- to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the
Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative
render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance
with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within
30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the
right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this
Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direc-
tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there-
from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the
Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela-
tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should
the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may
"~ be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint
from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative
may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that
said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con-
tractor shall furnish alL reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors
or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey
the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when
such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying
plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate
engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for his decision.
-26-
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and
shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all
satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence
and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by
competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the
work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con-
tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or
any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na-
ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate-
rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the
prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect
the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of
the owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or
obligations herein contained.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis-
orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with-
out the Owner's Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu-
tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that owner shall fur-
nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation,
conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it
is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure
shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob-
servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall
be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
-27-
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the
work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser-
vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain
the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am-
ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep-
resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re-
gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of
whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work
should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre-
sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is
being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa-
tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's
Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection,
testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the
work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed
by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required
by law or the contract documents.
If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa-
tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec-
tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work
which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets
the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents
shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
►-� Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections,
tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with
the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work
for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as un-
suitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after
receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re-
build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur-
ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part
thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this
contract and the accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the
basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they in-
crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such
increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such
work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In
-28-
case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate-
rial already furnished or used in said work, then the owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material
or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in
preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al-
teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov-
ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa-
tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the
right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also
agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined
by the following methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com-
menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus
fifteen (15%) per cent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para-
graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as
foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and
equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges
necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including
Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's
Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or
Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts
of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's
Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the
method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat-
ters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin-
ery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of
Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical,
the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work
order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com-
pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele-
ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the
Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost
to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In
case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the owner's Repre-
sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what
does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative in-
sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for
written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided
under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi-
tration as herein below provided.
-29-
r-
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor
and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the
intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any
discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the
Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is
received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the
Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to
complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re-
quest for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the
quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative
may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and
the Contractor shall comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci-
fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an
extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workmen's Compensation Laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
—» precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with aLl applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal Laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "ManuaL of Accident Prevention
in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state
or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indem-
nify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or
claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus-
tained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or
any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the
project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon-
tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment
with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or, any of its officers, agents, or employees including
attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as
an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be
given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro-
gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump-
tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
-30-
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, in-
surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au-
thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this
contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided
covering the operation of each subcontractor.
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily
Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury (with exclusion 110 waived)
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of
the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy
naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows
For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property
Damage.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury $250/500,000
Property Damage $100,000
to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -
owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific
job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten-
tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
-31-
E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of
($1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen-
sive Automobile Liability coverages.
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of
the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub-
contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the
Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and
offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized
^^ representative of the insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne
by such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the
.- date borne by such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in-
sured at the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in
or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con-
tained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept-
able.
29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT
AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the owner harmless from all claims growing out of any
demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts
thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the
performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence
that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by
any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness
within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness
-32-
shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such
unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de-
vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten-
tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or
copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that
Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci-
fied or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de-
vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harm-
less from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by owner is an in-
fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the
Owner of such infringement.
31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such taws, ordinances, and regulations, whether
by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at
variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes
shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work
knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the
Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in-
sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the
Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to
the same effect as though embodied herein.
32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to
the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature
of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor
from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement.
33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential
conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this
contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or
any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con-
sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total
compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
-33-
for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall
be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the com-
pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid-
eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this Local-
ity.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the owner because of the impractica-
bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus-
tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from
current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this
contract.
34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con-
tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and
in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and
time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in
accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in
the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his
own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this
contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the
Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at
which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev-
eral parts.
35. EXTENSION OF TIME
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the
completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions
prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove
set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract,
except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees
of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike,
walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex-
tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative
for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re-
ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu-
mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con-
sideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of
time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided.
36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within
the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in-
cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge
-34-
shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of
the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's
Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's
Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.
In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract,
including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be
done and material to be furnished hereunder. where the estimated quantities are shown for the various
classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to
be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of-
fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials
to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for
payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done
and materials furnished on the project.
38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any
way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken
under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be
Liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent
property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims
for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor-
mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis-
tence or character of the work.
39. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all
work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity
with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price
set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor
hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the
aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the
whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract
documents and requirements of Owner's Representative.
40. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de-
fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the owner or
Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness
in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or
otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the con-
tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all
claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
-35-
41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica-
tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the
progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par-
tial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and
including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma-
terials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work.
-' The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount
of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5%
shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may
be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole
work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and
some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon
written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per-
centage due Contractor.
42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the owner's Representative written notice that
the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall in-
spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac-
cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his
certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to
issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
e..
43. FINAL PAYMENT
.� Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final
measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under
the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be-
fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of
this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con-
tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the
certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve
the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi-
tions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con-
tractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other
contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such
condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of
A.
responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for
any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the
-36-
date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de-
fects with reasonable promptness.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any
certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner,
which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of
them.
47. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the
Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the
Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to
take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and
render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's
Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in
writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's
Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by
the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted other-
wise in the contract documents.
48. ARBITRATION
All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either
party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named
in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se-
lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of
Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration
fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the de-
cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to
choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei-
ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the
arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings.
The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the
contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar-
biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be
according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated
Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT
SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION.
-37-
The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sus-
tained, such suns as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the
appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar-
biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs
and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ-
ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award.
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written
notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or-
ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or
the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to
complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any
rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as
provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and
materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided
for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work
in either of the following elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup-
plies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged
shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at
any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense
._, is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com-
pleted by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense
is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com-
pleted by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess
to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspa-
per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the
completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this
contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what
would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and
the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new
contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this
contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified
and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be
issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as
being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or
his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within
30 days after the date of certificate of completion.
-38-
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which
would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this
contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be
turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract
price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the
work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that
actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the
duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date
of said notice the owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either
public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin-
ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than
the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply
with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may
suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all
materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo-
rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount
earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Con-
tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a
fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided
for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sun to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con-
tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative
shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all
previous payments by the Owner and all other suns that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this
Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days
after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the
Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with
Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the
event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu-
tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner,
and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur-
ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished.
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con-
ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the
special conditions shall control.
-39-
..«
r-.
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution
of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au-
thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance
of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob-
serve Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly
reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at
any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either
the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or
corporation.
55. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and
at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and
condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
-40-
(This page left blank intentionally)
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
P.-
-41-
(This page left blank intentionally)
SPECIFICATIONS
-42-
(This page left blank intentionally)
1989 PAWS/ANIMAL CONTROL CENTER ADDITIONS
for the City of Lubbock
Lubbock Texas
TABLE OF CONTENTS: Following is the enumeration of the technical
specifications.
BOUND HEREIN
Pages
-- Title Page 1
Table of Contents 2
r., SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
1CO
Cutting and Patching
4
Section
1G5
Alternates
3-
Section
1P3
Shop Drawings
2
Section
1Q1
Samples
2
r..
DIVISION 2
SITEWORK
Section
2BO
Excavating, Filling and Grading
11
Section
2P1
Asphalt Concrete Paving
7
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
Section
3A0
Concrete Work
1
DIVISION 4
MASONRY
Section
4AO
Unit Masonry Work
1
DIVISION 5
METALS
Section
5E1
Metal Decking
Section
5JO
Metal Fabrications
6
DIVISION 6
CARPENTRY
Section
6GO
Architectural Woodwork
6
DIVISION 7
MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section
7GO
ThermalInsulation
2
Section
7PO
Flashings and Sheet Metal
2
Section
7P2
Metal Gutters
4
Section
7TO
Joint Sealers
5
DIVISION 8
DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section
8J1
Custom Hollow Metal Work
7
Section
8KO
Wood Doors
3
�. Section
8SO
Builders Hardware
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Section
Predecorated Gypsum Board
4
Section
9DO
Gypsum Drywall
6
Section
9EO
Acoustical Ceilings
6
Section
9GO
Tile Work
3
Section
9NO
Resilient Flooring
4
Section
9TO
Painting
9
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
Section
10A1
Metal Toilet Partitions
Section
1OB1
Toilet Accessories
3
Section
1OB3
Metal Framed Mirrors
2
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
Not applicable
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
Not app
I ica e
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
ection
r—e-engi neered Bul Idings
7
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not app
i ca e
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL
Section
15A
Mechanical and Electrical enera
Section
15B
Mechanical Identification
2
Section
15C
Pipe, Tubes and Fittings
9
Section
15D
Supports, Anchors and Seals
3
Section
15E
Valves
4
Section
15F
Mechanical Insulation
6
Section
15G
Natural Gas Piping Systems
3
Section
15H
Soil & Waste Piping Systems
2
Section
15I
Domestic Water Piping
3
Section
15J
Plumbing Equipment
3
Section
15K
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
4
Section
15L
Refrigeration Piping Systems
2
Section
15M
Split Systems
4
Section
15N
Exhaust Fans
4
Section
15P
Low Pressure Ductwork
7
Section
15Q
Automatic Temperature Controls
2
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
ection
16A
Electricalen i ica ion
Section
16B
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
8
Section
16C
Wiring Devices
3.
Section
16D
Power Distribution
7
Section
16E
Motor and Circuit Disconnects
3
Section
16F
Building Lighting
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1CO
CUTTING AND PATCHING
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other General Requirements sections, apply
to the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
'^ Definition: "Cutting -and -patching" is hereby defined to include but is
not necessarily limited to the cutting and patching of nominally
completed and previously existing work, in order to accommodate the
.� coordination of work, or the installation of other work, or to uncover
other work for access or inspection, or to obtain samples for testing,
or for similar purposes; and is defined to exclude integral cutting -
and -patching during the mfg. fabricating, erecting and installing
R` process for individual units of work. Drilling the work to install
fasteners and similar operations are excluded from the definition of
cutting -and -patching.
Restoring.or removing and replacing non -complying work is specified
separately from cutting -and -patching, but may require cutting -and -
patching operations as specified herein.
Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting -
and -patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual
units of work.
Refer.to the 15A-Series and 16A Series sections, for additional
,.. requirements and limitation on the cutting -and -patching of
mechanical and electrical work, respectively. The requirements of
this section apply to mechanical and electrical work, unless
otherwise indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Requirements for Structural Work:
General: Do not cut -and -patch structural work in a manner resulting in
a reduction of load -carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio.
Prior to cutting -and -patching the following categories of work,
obtain the Architect's/Engineer's approval to proceed:
Structural steel
Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment
supports, stair systems and similar categories of work.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-1
Structural concrete.
Foundation construction.
Searing and retaining walls.
Structural decking.
Pressurized piping, vessels and equipment.
Structural systems of special construction, as specified by
Division 13 sections.
Timber and primary wood framing.
Operational and Safety Limitation:
General: Do not cut -and -patch operational elements and safety -related
components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to
perform in the manner intended or resulting in decreased operational
life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.
Prior to cutting -and -patching the following categories of the
work, and similar categories where directed, obtain the
Architect's/Engineer's approval to proceed:
Sheeting, shoring and cross -lot bracing.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Water/moisture/vapor/air/smoke barriers, membranes and
flashings.
Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
Control, communication, conveying, and electrical wiring
systems.
Special constructions, as specified by Division-13 sections.
Visual Requirements:
General: Do not cut -and -patch work which is exposed on the exterior or
exposed in occupied spaces of the building, in a manner resulting in a
reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of
the cut -and -patch work, both as judged solely by the Architect.
Removal and replace work judged by the Architect to be cut -and -patched
in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-2
Engage the original Installer/Fabricator to perform cutting -and -
patching of the following categories of exposed work, or where original
Installer/Fabricator is not available, (e.g. for work of a prior time),
engage recognized expert entities to perform cut -and -patch work.
Ornamental metal.
Roofing.
Acoustical ceilings.
SUBMITTALS: Approval by Architect/Engineer to proceed with proposed
cutting -and -patching does not waive right to later require complete
removal and replacement of work found to be cut -and -patched in an
unsatisfactory manner.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the
rA cTiitect/Engineer, provide materials for cutting -and -patching which,
will result in equal -or -better work than the work being cut -and-
patched, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual
effect where applicable. Comply with the requirements, and use
materials identical with the original materials where feasible and
where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be
cut, to prevent failure, Do not endanger other work.
Protection: Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting -
and -patching, to prevent damage; and provide protection of the work
from adverse weather exposure.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
General: Employ skilled tradesmen to perform cutting -and -patching.
Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect/Engineer,
proceed with cutting -and -patching at the earliest feasible time, in
each instance, and perform the work promptly.
Cut work by methods least likely to -damage work to be retained and work
adjoining. Review proposed procedure with original Installer where
possible, and comply with his recommendations.
In general, where physical cutting action is required, cut work
with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping
-- tools. Core drill openings through concrete work.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-3
Comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 2
where cutting -and -patching required excavating and backfilling.
Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible.
Comply with specified tolerances for the work.
Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate
integrity of work.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend
finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will
eliminate evidence of patching.
Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint
coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after
patched area has received prime and base coats.
END OF SECTION
CUTTING AND PATCHING 1CO-4
SECTION 1G5
ALTERNAT-Cs
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provisions of the Contract, including General
-^ Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions,
and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified
in this section.
GENERAL
Each of the Alternates set forth herein shall be bid to show a
deduction to the BASE BID. The alternates will be considered by
the Owner and may or may not be accepted.
All work under the alternates shall comply with the applicable
provisions of the drawings and specifications. The work under any
alternate shall include any additional work required to complete
the remaining work which is affected thereby, in a finished _
condition unless specifically noted to remain unfinished.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ALTERNATES
ALTERNATE NO. 1: Under Alternate No. 1, the Bidder shall omit new
2x4 lay -in ceiling tiles, suspension system, moldings and
�., accessories as specified in Southwest addition. Suspend 2x4 lay -
in type light fixtures directly from roof structure where ceiling
is omitted.
ALTERNATE NO. 2: Under Alternate No. 2, the Bidder shall reduce
number of depicted 2x4 lay -in fluorescent light fixtures in the
Southwest addition from 20 as shown to 10. Provide adequate
spacing and lay -out to provide equal amount of light to all
portions of space.
ALTERNATE NO. 3: Under Alternate No. 3, the bidder shall omit the
relocation of the Euthanasia Room in the Southwest Addition. Omit
the relocation and reinstallation of existing equipment and
materials as well as new equipment and materials required.
Provide a new CMU screen wall built tight to the ceiling with a
new door, relocate one existing door to a new opening in the
existing wall. Relocate the hot and cold water lines, cut-off
valves and drain lines required for the future clothes washer and
water heater. Relocate existing exhaust fan flue up through roof
with appropriate flashing. Refer to the partial floor plan titled
Alternate 3 at the end of this section.
ALTERNATE NO. 4: Under Alternate No. 4, the Bidder shall omit the
hot and cold water lines, cut-off valves, and drain lines required
for the future clothes washer and water heater at the Southwest
Addition.
ALTERNATES 1G5-1
ALTERNATE NO. 5: Under Alternate No. 5, the Bidder shall omit the
ceramic wall tile to 48" as shown in the Finish Schedule and at
drawings A211 and A215. Continue the pre -finished gypsum board
from floor to ceiling on wall surfaces where tile was scheduled.
ALTERNATES 1G5-2
STUB HOT & COLD WATER
LINES FOR FUTURE CLOTHES
WASHER & WATER HEATER
PROVIDE CUT—OFF VALVES
CONST.
Pr .
I..
411
PRE—MFRD :TRENCH
,., DRAIN W/GRATE AS
SPEC.
I
ANIMAL VIEWING A
E
RELOCATE EXIST. DOOR,
.-� FRAME & HARDWARE TO NEW
OCATION
PATCH HOLE FRO
'^ REMOVED VENT
i
5
EXIST.
CONST. '
PROVIDE DRAIN FOR
FUTURE CLOTHES WASH 1
REPL.CONC.TO EXIST. I
EVEL & STATE
oo I
DOCK AREA
I
5'-0" I NEW CMU WALL
BUILT TIGHT
TO CLG.
i
7DUCT RE—ROUTE EXIST. E.F THRU ROOF USIN
PROPER FLASHING
STORAGE ARE
1/8"sc PARTIAL PLAT
ALTERNATE NO. 3
END OF SECTION
ALTERNATES
north
1G5-3
SECTION 1P3
SHOP DRAWINGS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other General Requirements sections, apply
to the work specified in this section.
GENERAL SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS:
Preparation: Submit newly prepared information; do not reproduce
contract documents or copy standard printed information as basis of
shop drawings. Prepare on reproducible sheets, not less than 8
1/2"x11", and not larger than 36"x48" except for actual pattern or
template type drawings. Prepare shop drawings to accurate scale,
except where other form is indicated as acceptable. Indicated name of
firm which has prepared each shop drawing, and provide appropriate
project identification.
Specific Information: Unique information required on each shop
drawings is indicatein individual sections of these specifications
for individual units of work. General information required
specifically on shop drawings at time of submittal includes dimensions
special notation of dimensions which have been established by way of
field measurements, identification of specific products and materials
which are included in the work shown by shop drawings, compliance with
standards, and notations of required interfaces with other work
(coordination requirements).
Refer to 15A and 16A Series sections for additional general
requirements applicable to shop drawings for mechanical work and
electrical work, respectively.
List of Shop Drawings: Prepare a listing and time schedule for
sul5mittal and processing of principal shop drawings, showing initial
submittal date, processing time, fabrication time, delivery date, and
installation time for the work shown by each shop drawing. Submit
listing and time schedule within 45 days of date of commencement of the
work.
SUBMITTAL QUANTITIES AND PROCEDURES:
Initial Submittals: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work
sections of these specifications, submit one correctable translucent
reproducible print and one blue -line or black -line opaque print of each
shop drawing. Architect/Engineer will use and retain opaque print as
review worksheet, and will return reproducible print marked with
"Action" and with corrections and modifications(if any) as required.
SHOP DRAWINGS 1P3-1
�- Printing and Distribution: Print and distribute shop drawings which
ave been released by Architect/Engineer for project use. Furnish
copies to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, manufacturers,
,., installers, governing authorities and others as required for proper
performance of the work.
PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION: (not applicable)
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS 1P3-2
SECTION 1Q1
SAMPLES
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including
enera I an upp ementary Conditions and other General Requirements
sections, apply to the work specified in this section.
GENERAL SAMPLE SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
Preparation of Samples: Where possible, prepare samples to be
physically identical with proposed material or product to be
incorporated in the work, fully fabricated, cured and finished in
manner specified, and at full scale. Where variations in color,
pattern or textur are inherent in material or product represented by
sample, submit multiple units of sample which will show near -limits of
variations and "average" of whole range (not less than 3 units). Plark
each unit to describe its relation to range of variation. Where
samples are specified for Architect's/Engineer's selection of color,
pattern or texture, submit full set of available choices for material
or product as specified. Mount, display or package each sample in
manner specified, to facilitate review of indicated qualities. Prepare
samples to match Architect's/Engineer's sample where so indicated.
Specific Requirements: Specific requirements for each set of samples
are specs ie in individual sections of these specifications for
individual units of work. General provisions required specifically for
sample submittals include generic description of sample, source or
product name and mfr., limitations in terms of availability, sizes,
delivery times and similar characteristics, and compliances with
governing regulations and recognized standards.
Refer to 15A and 16A Series sections for additional general
requirements applicable to samples for mechanical and electrical
work, respectively.
List of Sample Submittals: Prepare a listing and time schedule for
submittal of principal samples, showing purchasing time, fabrication
and delivery time, and installation time for each material, product or
system represented by sample. Submit time schedule within 45 days of
date of commencement of the work.
SUBMITTAL QUANTITIES AND PROCEDURES:
General: It is recognized that samples, except as otherwise
specifically indicated, are submitted for Architect/Engineer visual
review of general generic kind, color, pattern and texture, and for
final check of intended coordination of these characteristics between
various elements of the work; and for quality control comparisons of
these characteristics between final samples and actual work as it is
SAMPLES 1Q1-1
delivered and installed. Refer to individual work sections of these
specifications for additional requirements of samples (if any) which
may be intended for examination or testing for other characteristics.
Compliance with other characteristics (as required by contract
documents) is otherwise exclusive responsibility. of Contractor, and is
not subject to Architect/Engineer review and "Action
Refer to individual work sections for samples which are intended
to be returned to Contractor for actual incorporation in the work
.. (because of their relatively high cost or other consideration as
indicated). Indicate on transmittal form (to Architect/Engineer ),
special requests concerning disposition of submitted samples.
0
Initial Submittal: Initial submittal of samples, as designated on
transmittal, may be either a preliminary submittal of a single set or
final submittal, at Contractor's option and depending upon nature of
the anticipated response from Architect /Engineer. Preliminary
submittals (if any) will be reviewed and returned with
Architect /Engineer "Action".
Distribution of Samples: Maintain each final submittal set of samples
as returned y Architect/Engineer) at project site, available for
quality control comparisons through course of performing the work and
obtaining final acceptance of the work associated with each set of
samples. Prepare and distribute additional sets of samples to
subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, mfrs, installers, governing
authorities; and others as required for proper performance of the work.
PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION: (not applicable)
END OF SECTION
SAMPLES 1Q1-2
SECTION 2B0
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of excavation, filling and grading is shown on the drawings.
Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements
is included as part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within the building lines is included as
part of this work. _
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
Asphalt Concrete Paving: 2P-Series sections.
Concrete for structures: Division 3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with
applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and Inspection Service:
Owner may engage soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations.
CIIRMTTT111 C-
Test Reports -Excavating, Fillin
Architect):
and Grading (if Requested
Submit 2 copies of the following reports directly to the Architect from
the testing services, with copy to the Contractor:
Test reports on borrow material will be required if a substantial
amount of borrow material is needed. If grading is doen
correctly, very little (if any) fill will be needed.
Verification of each footing subgrade.
Field density test reports.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-1
One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered.
Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of
bearing tests of each strata tested.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not
intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity
between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by
Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of Contractor.
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by
Contractor at no cost to Owner.
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas
of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means
of protection during earthwork operations. -
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult- the Utility Owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and
used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect
and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been
provided.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities
indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-
off of services if lines are active.
.- Use of Explosives:
The use of explosives is not permitted.
Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without prior written
permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor is solely
responsible for handling, storage, and use of explosive materials when
their use is permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations
occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
�- EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-2
Protect structures,
facilities from damage
undermining, washout and
PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS:
Definitions:
utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other
caused by settlement, lateral movement,
other hazards created by earthwork operations.
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) M145, soil classification Groups A-1,
A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
Unsatisfactory soil materials are those defined in AASHTO M145 soil
classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7; also, peat
and other highly organic soils.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural
or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed
sand, as acceptable to the Architect.
Drainage Fill: Washed, uniformly graded mixture of crushed stone, or
crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and not
more than 5% passing as No. 4 sieve.
Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay,
rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and
grading are to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
FXCAVATION:
Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered
when establishing required grade elevations.
Excavation Classifications:
The following classifications of excavation will be made when
unanticipated rock excavation is encountered in the work.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-3
Do not perform such work until material to be excavated has been
cross -sectioned and classified by Architect. Such excavation will
be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in
work.
Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other
obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and
utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any
classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other
materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or
unauthorized excavation.
Rock excavation consists of removal and disposal of materials
encountered that cannot be excavated with a 3/4 cubic yard capacity
power shovel without drilling and blasting, or continuous use of a
ripper or other special equipment, except such materials that are
r- classified as earth excavation.
Typical of materials classified as rock are boulders
1/2 cu. yd. or more in volume, solid rock, rock in ledges, and -
rock -hard cementitious aggregate deposits.
Intermittent drilling performed to increase productions and not
necessary to permit excavations of material encountered will be
classified as earth excavation.
Rock payment lines are limited to the following:
Two feet outside of concrete work for which forms are required,
except footings.
One foot outside the perimeter of footings.
In pipe trenches, 6" below invert elevation of pipe and
2 ft. wider than the inside diameter of pipe, but not less than 3
ft. minimum trench width.
Neat outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are
required.
Under slabs on grade, 6" below the bottom of concrete slab.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction
of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing
or base to the excavation bottom. without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to
proper position, when acceptable to Architect.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-4
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified
for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise
directed by Architect.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade
elevations, notify the Architect who will make an inspection of
conditions.
If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated
material as directed by the Architect.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be
paid on the basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with
local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where
sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of
material excavated.
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such
as Sheet pi i ng, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good
serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with
local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period
excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation
progresses.
Dewateri ng: Prevent surface water and subsurface 'or ground water from
Mowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding
area.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and
soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge
lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water
away from excavations.
Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or
run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and
other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not
use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-5
Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where
erected, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape
stockpiles for proper drainage.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown
within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and extending a sufficient
distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of
concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and
for inspection.
In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb
bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before
concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive concrete.
Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with
cross -sections, elevations and grades as shown.
` Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required
or the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide
ample working room.
Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth
of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow lines and invert
elevations. Beyond the building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches
sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
Where rock is encountered, carry the excavation 6" below the required
elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior
to installing pipe.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to
provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.
Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within
18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below the bottom
of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to
the level of the bottom of adjacent footing.
Concrete is specified in Division 3.
Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and
backfilling authorized by the Architect. Use care in backfilling to
avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing
when atmospheric temperature is less than
35 degrees F.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-6
COMPACTION:
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum
percentage of density specified for each area classification.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements:
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry
density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density
relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less
than the following percentages of relative density, determined in
accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-
defined moisture -density relationship.
Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90%
relative dry density.
Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each
layer of backfillor fill material at 95/ maximum dry density or-
90% relatively dry density.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer
of backfillor fill material at 90% maximum dry density.
Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density.
Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density for cohesive soil material.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water
appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too
wet to permit compaction to specified density.
Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to
permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry.
Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture
content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AND FILL:
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade
e evations, for each area classification listed below.
In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-7
Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material.
Under walks and pavements, use subbase material, or satisfactory
excavated or borrow material, or combination of both.
Under steps, use subbase material.
Under building slabs, use drainage fill material.
Backfil1 excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until
completion of the following:
Acceptance by Architect of construction below finish grade
including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
r
Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of
underground utilities.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with
"^ satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven
below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent
settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if
--, required.
Removal of trash and debris.
Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on
horizontally supported walls.
-� Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory
soil mate ria s, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground
surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break-up sloped
�.. surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material
will bond with existing surface.
When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under "Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the
ground surface; pulverize, moisture -condition to the optimum moisture
content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
r- density.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers
not more than 8 in loose depth for material compacted by heavy
compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material
compacted by:.hand-operated tampers.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-8
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide
the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area
classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces
that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure
to approximately same elevation in each lift.
GRADING:
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface
within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes
between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and
existing grades.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines -
to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding.
Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade
and cross-section, with finish surface to be same as existing
bordering pavement.
Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even,
free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.
Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10'
straightedge.
Compaction:
After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of
maximum density for each area classification.
PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE:
General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in
layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a
pavement base course.
See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications.
Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades
including crown and cross -slope of subbase course.
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-9
r-.
Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials,
placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course
layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width of shoulder
simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase
course.
Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers
of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and
.. thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase
material during placement operations.
When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place
material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less
than 3" in thickness when compacted.
BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE:
General: Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill-
materia7-, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to
support concrete building slabs.
Placing:
Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform
thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.
Maintain optimum moisture content, for compacting material during
placement operations.
When a compacted drainage course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place
material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less
than 3" in thickness when compacted.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to
inspect and approve su grades and fill layers before further
construction work is performed.
If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and
inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense.
MAINTENANCE:
Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic
and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted area to
specified tolerances. .
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-10
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by 'subsequent construction operations or adverse weather,
scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to
further construction.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
Removal from Owner's Property:
Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and
dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2BO-11
SECTION 2P1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of asphalt concrete paving (AsCon-Pvg) work is shown on the
drawings.
Prepared aggregate subbase is specified in "Excavation, Filling and
Grading" section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Only Contractors with at least 5 years in the pavements contracting
business will be allowed to perform this work or as acceptable by the
Architect.
CIIRMTTTALS
Material Certificates:
Provide copies of materials and installation certificates in lieu of
'^ materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect.
Material certificates shall be signed by material producer and
Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or
exceeds, specified requirements.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Weather Limitations: Apply bituminous prime and tack coats only when
ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F., and when temperature has
not been below 35 F. for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do
not apply when base surface is wet or contains an excess of moisture
which would prevent uniform distribution and required penetration.
-- Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when atmospheric
temperature is above 40 F., when underlying base is dry, and when
weather is not rainy. Base course may be placed when air temperature
�., is above 30 F. and rising.
Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and grades,
including crown and cross -slope, for each course during construction
operations.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-1
Traffic Control: Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic during
paving operations, as required for other construction activities and
Owners daily business operations.
Provide barricades, warning signs, and warning lights for movement of
traffic and safety and to cause least interruption of work.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General: Locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a
saa isf actory record of previous installations may be provided if
acceptable to Architect.
Base Course Aggregate: Re -use excavated material to the level which is
below top of existing asphalt.
Surface Course Aggregate: 6" compacted Caliche.
Asphalt Cement: AASHTO M 226 (ASTM D 3881).
Viscosity Grade: Industry standard for this type of construction
and geograp is ocation.
Prime Coat: Cut -back asphalt type complying with requirements for
liquid asp{-alts as specified in AASHTO M 82 (ASTM D 2027), as follows.
Grade: Typical to industry's standard for this type of
construction and geographic location.
Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt complying with AASHTO M 140 or M 208
(ASTMD 977 or D 2397), diluted with one part water to one part
emulsified asphalt.
Grade: Typical to industry's standard for this type of
construction and geographic location.
ASPHALT -AGGREGATE MIXTURES:
Provide job -mix formula as close as can be estimated to the existing
condition.
Aggregate Passing: Match existing sieve number.
Performance Requirements: Conform to indicated performance
requirements for each type of asphalt concrete mixture, as herein
specified or as shown on drawings.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-2
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Paver must examine areas and conditions under which asphalt concrete
paving is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in a manner acceptable to Paver.
SURFACE PREPARATION:
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
applying prime coat. Use power brooms or blowers supplemented by hand
brooms or other acceptable means.
Proof roll prepared subbase surface using heavy, rubber -tired rollers
to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction.
Prime Coat: Uniformly apply prime coat, distributed at rate of 0.20 to-
0.50 gal'. per sq. yd., over compacted subbase surface. Apply
sufficient material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, the surface.
Allow to cure and dry as long as required to attain penetration and
evaporation of volatile, and in no case less than 48 hours.
Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt
or portland cement concrete and similar surfaces. Distribute at rate
of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd. of surface.
Apply tack coat by brush to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters,
manholes, and other structures projecting into or abutting asphalt
concrete pavement.
Allow surfaces to dry until tack coat material is at proper condition
of tackiness to receive asphalt concrete mixture.
PREPARING THE MIX:
Aggregate Storage: Keep each component of various -sized combined
aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain stockpiles so that
aggregate sizes. wi l l not be intermixed and to prevent segregation.
Asphalt Cement Preparation: Heat asphalt cement at mixing plant to a
-- viscosity which can readily be pumped and distributed throughout the
asphalt concrete mixture. Add asphalt cement binder to aggregate at a
temperature between 235 degrees F and 350 degrees F.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING I2P1-3
Aggregate Preparation: Dry aggregates and deliver to mixer at a
temperature between 235 degrees F and 350 degrees F. Maintain the
temperature between these limits according to the penetration grade and
viscosity characteristics of the asphalt cement, ambient temperature,
and workability of the mixture, while the asphalt cement is being
added.
Dry aggregates to reduce moisture -content to prevent asphalt concrete
mixture from foaming, slumping or segregating during hauling and
placing operations.
Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dried aggregates and weigh or
meter asphalt cement to comply with job -mix formula requirements. Do
not heat asphalt cement above 350 degrees F. at time of introduction
i nt o mixer.
Mix aggregate and asphalt cement to achieve 90-95% of coated particles
for base mixture and 85-90% of coated particles for surface mixture.
Delivery: Transport asphalt concrete mixtures from mixing plant to -
project site in trucks having tight, clean compartments. If required,
coat hauling compartment surfaces with a lime -water mixture or a soap
or detergent solution to prevent asphalt concrete mixture from
sticking. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before
loading mix.
Provide covers over asphalt concrete mixture when delivering to
protect mixture from weather and to prevent loss of .heat.
During periods of cool weather or for long-distance deliveries,
provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces.
PLACING THE MIX:
General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread
an strike -off using an acceptable bituminous paver. Spread mixture at
minimum temperature of 225 F. Inaccessible and small areas may be
placed by hand. Place each course in required amounts so that when
compacted, they will conform to indicated grade, cross-section, and
compacted thickness.
Paver Placing: Unless otherwise directed, begin placing along
centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section, and at the high
side of sections with a one-way slope, and in direction of traffic
flow.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-4
Place in strips. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place
succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips.
Complete base course for a section before placing surface course
materials. Place mixture in as continuous an operation as possible.
Hand Placing: Spread, tamp and finish mixture using hand tools in
areas where use of machine spreading is not practical. Place mixture
at a rate that will ensure proper handling and compaction before
mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature.
Joints: Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, or
e� tween successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between
adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density and
smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course.
Clean contact surfaces of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material
and apply tack coat.
Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than 24". Cut
back edge of previously placed course to expose even, vertical surface_
for full course thickness.
Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6".
When edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honey -combed, or
inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose
even, vertical surface for full course thickness.
r-
Protect newly -placed material from traffic by barricades or other
suitable method until mixture has cooled and attained its maximum
degree of hardness while not disrupting Owner's daily business
operations.
COMPACTING THE MIX:
General: Begin rolling operations as soon after placing when mixture
will ear roller weight without excessive displacement. Do not
suddenly .change line or direction of rolling.
Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in
areas inaccessible to rollers.
Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers, to stand on finished
surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set.
Procedure: Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of
sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly
different.lengths on alternate runs of rollers. Do not roll center of
sections first under any circumstances.
Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately
following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside
edge. Operate rollers as close as possible to pave without causing
displacement.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-5
Check crown, grade, and smoothness after breakdown rolling. Repair
displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling,
if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling.
Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while
mixture is of and in condition for proper compaction.
Continue second rolling for at least 3 complete coverages or until
mixture has been thoroughly compacted.
Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm
enough or removal of roller marks: Continue rolling until roller
marks are eliminated and the course has attained the required density.
Patching: Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign
ma eria s and defective areas. Cut-out such areas and fill with fresh,
hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density
and smoothness.
.Remove deficient areas for depth of the course. Cut sides -
perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical.
Apply tack coat before placing asphalt concrete mixture.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on
pavement until it has cooled enough not to get marked.
FOG SEAL (if applicable):
Clean surface of dirt and loose material immediately before applying
fog seal.
Apply asphalt emulsion at a temperature between 70 degrees F and 130
degrees F and at a rate of 0.10 to 0.20 gal. per sq. yd. Do not apply
when weather conditions are unsuitable or if atmospheric temperature is
below 55 degrees F.
MINIMUM QUALITY REQUIREMENTS:
General: In addition to other specified conditions, comply with
following minimum quality requirements. Test in -place asphalt concrete
base and surface courses for compliance with requirements for density,
thickness and surface smoothness. Provide final surfaces of uniform
texture, conforming to previously mentioned requirements.
Density: To match existing conditions as acceptable to Architect.
Average density is equal to or greater than 97%, and no
individual determination is lower than 95% of average existing
paving condition.
APSHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-6
P.-
Thickness: In -place compacted thicknesses will not be acceptable if
exceeding following allowable variation from thicknesses indicated.
Base Course: 1/2", plus or minus.
Surface Course: 1/4", plus or minus.
Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete
course for smoot Hess, using a 10' straightedge applied parallel with
and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be
acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness:
Base Course Surface: 1/4".
Wearing Course Surface: 3/16".
Check surfaced areas at intervals as directed by Architect.
Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right
angles -to crown. Surfaces will not be acceptable if finished crown -
surfaces -varies more than 1/4" from crown template.
END OF SECTION
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 2P1-7
SECTION 3A0
CONCRETE WORK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary
Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of concrete work shown on the drawings.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
Joint Sealers: 7T-Series Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards:
Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting
and Placing Concrete".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard
Practice".
Workmanship:
The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which
does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength,
tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the
Architect.
Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing
a oratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests
and to design concrete mixes.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO- 1
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as
directed by the Architect, at anytime during the progress of the work.
Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times.
Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense,
.-. including the retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall
be done at the Contractor's expense.
Tests for Concrete Materials:
Test aggregates by method of sampling and testing of
ASTM C 33.
For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by
the methods of test of ASTM C150.
Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and
tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification
name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete
testing services, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer
and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the
referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate
whether or not material is acceptable for intended use.
Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified
requirements may be submitted in lieu of testing, when acceptable to
the Architect. Certificates of compliance must be signed by the
materials producer and the Contractor.
SIIRMTTTAI S
Manufacturer's Data; Concrete Work:
Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including
reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds,
waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish
materials, and others as requested by the Architect.
Laboratory Test Reports; Concrete Work:
Submit 2 copies of laboratory test reports of concrete materials and
mix design test as specified as requested by Architect.
Material Certificates; Concrete Work:
Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test
reports only when permitted by the Architect. Material certificates
shall be signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor, certifying that
each material item complies with, or exceeds, the specified
requirements.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-2
PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS:
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or
specified, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with
plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel -
type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form
material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -
placed concrete without bow or deflection.
Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B
(Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -
oiled and edge -sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark
of an approved inspection agency.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will
e unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other
acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and
one side for tight fit. -
Form Coatings:
Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not
impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces to be cured with
water or curing compound.
REINFORCING MATERIALS:
Reinforcing Bar (ReBar): ASTM A 615, and as follows:
Provide Grade 60, except where otherwise shown, for bars No. 3 to
18.
Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for rei nforcement
including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing,
supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in
place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,
unless otherwise indicated. Wood, brick and other devices will not be
acceptable.
For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal
runners where wetted base material will not support chair legs.
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-3
Portland Cement: ASTM C 1,50, Type :l,.-unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified.. Provide
aggregates from a single source for all exposed concrete.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown
by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate
strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the
Architect.
Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun
gravel is not permitted.
Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one -fifth of the
narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth
of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between
individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.
Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
Type B, Retarding.
Type C, Accelerating.
Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding.
Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating.
Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless
^— otherwise authorized in writing by Architect.
RELATED MATERIALS:
Pre -Manufactured Trench Drains: The trench drains shall be POLYDRAIN
or pre -approved equal as m rd by POLYDRAIN, Inc., Troutman, NC (1-800-
438-6057 or 704-528-9806 in North Carolina). Channels shall have
interlocking joints and horizontal ribs to ensure a positive anchor in
the encasement concrete. Properly fitting outlets, end caps and
necessary catch basins shall be included.
The grate shall be POLYDRAIN No. 504 or pre -approved equal and be
capable of being locked to the chanel with removable lock downs.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-4
The trench drains shall be installed in accordance with mfr's
instructions and details. POLYSEAT installation chairs shall be used
where sub -base allows, to hold the channels to line and grade, prevent
floatation and ensure proper concrete encasement.
Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: See 7T-Series sections.
Joint Sealing Compound: See 7T-Series sections.
Chemical Hardener (ChHd-Fn): Colorless aqueous solution containing a
blend of magnesium f uosi icate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a
wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of fluosilicates per
gal.
Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C
Polyethylene film.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
Prepare. design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in
accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent
testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and
reporting proposed mi-x designs. The testing facility shall not be the
same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each
class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not
begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the
Architect.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following
properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules:
3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; 480 lbs. cement per cu. yd.
minimum; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested
y the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions,
weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at not
additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must
be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work.
Admixtures:
Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless
otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having air content within the following limits:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-5
Concrete structures :and .slabs exposed to freezing and thawing or
subjected to hydraulic pressure:
6% for max. 3/4" aggregate.
Other Concrete: 2% to 4% air.
Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance
with the manufacturer's directions.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust
quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
Slump Limits:
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of
placement as follows:
Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than
All Other Concrete: Not less than 1" and not more than 4".
CONCRETE MIXING:
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94, and as
herein specified.
Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to
.., the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water
to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting
of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be
required.
�— When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees
F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75
minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
EXECUTION
FORMS:
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical
and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be
supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete
members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation
and position.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-6
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage
to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes shapes, lines and
dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades,
level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings,
offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, molding, rustication, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and
other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain
required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints
to prevent leakage of cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where
stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with
bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement,
and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and
set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or
rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and
tight edge joints.
Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snapoff
metal orm ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent
spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within
concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2" inside concrete.
Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes
larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to
accommodate work of of er trades. Determine size and location of
openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces
o receive concrete.Re—move chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris
just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete
placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-7
Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing
Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars",
for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as
herein specified.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other
materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against
displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for
concrete protection. Arrange,. space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement
operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of
continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for
-~ concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
Install welded wire fabric in as long_ lengths as practicable. Lap
-. adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire.
Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
JOINTS:
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are
.— not shown on the —drawings, so as not to impair the strength and
appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect.
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in all construction joints in
walls, slabs and between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads
designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
^^ Place const ruction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Continue all reinforcement across construction joints.
Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as shown on the
drawings. Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each
joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops during the
progress of the work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Protect waterstop
material from damage where it protrudes from any point.
Isolation Joints in Slabs -on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in
slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams and elsewhere as indicated.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-8
Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in the 7T-Series
sections of these specifications.
Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct control joints in slabs -
on -ground o torm panels ot pa erns as shown. Use inserts 1/4" wide x
1/5 to 1/4 of the slab depth, unless otherwise shown.
Form control joints by inserting a premolded hardboard or fiberboard
strip into the fresh concrete until the top surface of the strip is
flush with the slab surface. After the concrete has cured, remove
inserts and clean groove of loose debris.
Joint sealant material is specified in the 7T-Series section of
these specifications.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
emmeedaed items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be
attached thereto.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads
and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required
elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and
secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed strips
by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before
reinforcement is placed.
Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in
amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material
to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete
surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
Coat steel forms with a non -staining, rust -preventative form oil or
otherwise protect against rusting. Rust -stained steel formwork is not
acceptable.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete
e Tormwork insta ation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded
or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their
work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.
Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as
required where form coatings are not used.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-9
Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers
with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no
concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints
as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its
final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper tan 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place
each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the
recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and
project conditions.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and
withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther
than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to
rapidly penetrate the placed layer of concrete and at least 6" into the
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete
r- that have begun to set. At each insertion limit the duration of
vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a
continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until
the placing of a panel or section is completed.
Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and
into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and
strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving
it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic
surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
-" operations.
Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement
operations.
Cold Weather:.Placing:
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-10
Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which
could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in
compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as
required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50
degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F. at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do
not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing
antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted
in mix designs.
Hot Weather Placing:
When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI
305 and as herein specified.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time
of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or
chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided
the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of
mixing.
Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot,
so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient, air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix
designs.
Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that
are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces
that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin-
film finish coating system.
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -
driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing
sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by
final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in
texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not
exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind
smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor
covering system.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-11
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a
relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for
nydrati n of cement and proper hardening.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and
before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days
in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of
final curing period.
Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by
moisture -retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, and by
combinations thereof, as herein specified.
Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends
lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by
moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms
are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods
specified above, as applicable.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor
topping, and other flat surfaces by application of the appropriate
curing compound.
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish
flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
REMOVAL OF FORMS:
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after
placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection
�- operations are maintained.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-12
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joints,
slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14
days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive
strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of
inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of
concrete location or members.
Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if
shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal
of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and
supports.
RE -USE OF FORMS:
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split,
frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not
be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete
contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly
clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close
joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use -
"patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to
Architect.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for
passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete
as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete
work.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms
w i e concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard,
dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly
rounded.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases
and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines
and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with
certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines
and equipment.
Reinforced Masonry:
Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams
where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate
location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-13
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement
mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to
Architect.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no
case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to
the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary
patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat
the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding
agent.
For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color
surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify
mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact
mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having -
defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of
Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture
irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets;
fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured
-~ in place with bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects
that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects
cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as
monolithic stabs, or smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high
areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for
trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having
required slope.
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely
affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include
crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other
objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has
cured at least 14 days.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-14
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and
replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when
acceptable to Architects.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square
cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all
around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete,
and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same
type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend
with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent
concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter
by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound
concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned
concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete
bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to-
2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only
enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack
mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by
Architect.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance
of Architect.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
The Owner may employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests
and to submit test reports.
Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of
concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of
discharge; and one test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; STM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for
each set. of compressive strength test specimens.
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-15
Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each
time a set of compression test specimens made.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of & standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu.
yds. or traction thereof, f each concrete class placed in any one
day or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 2 specimens
tested at 7 days, 3 specimens tested at 28-days, and one specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least
5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than
50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, -
in his judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of
companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations
and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the
'^ in -place concrete.
Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the
Contractor on the same day that test are made. Reports of compressive
strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure,
design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-
day tests and 28-day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of
in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete
strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor
shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as
may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE WORK 3AO-16
SECTION 4AO
UNIT MASONRY WORK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of unit masonry work is shown on the drawings.
Job Mock -Up:
Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panel mock-up
using materials, bond and joint tooling required for final work.
Provide special features as directed for caulking and contiguous work._
Build mock-up at the site, where directed, of full thickness and
approximately 4' x 4', indicating the proposed range of color, texture
and workmanship to be expected in- the completed work. Obtain
Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start
of masonry work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up
until work is completed. Use sample panels to test proposed cleaning
procedures. Provide separate mock-up panel for the following:
Typical exterior face brick wall.
Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels parallel to existing
surface.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data; Unit Masonry:
Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of
masonry unit and accessory required including certification that each
type complies with the specified requirements. Include instructions
for handling, storage, installation and protection. Transmit a copy of
each instruction to the Installer.
Samples; Unit Masonry: - -
Submit 5 samples of each type of exposed brick required. Include in
each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in
the completed work. Architect's review will be for' color and texture
only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-1
JOB CONDITIONS:
Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of wall with heavy
waterproof sheeting at end of each days' work. cover partially
completed structures when work is not in progress.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover
securely in place.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after
building masonry walls or columns.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building
masonry walls or columns.
Stai ni ng: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to
Ee Tfe t exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in
contact with such masonry.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
Cold Weather Protection:
Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat
until top surface is dry to the touch.
Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing
conditions.
Perform the following construction procedures while the work is
progressing:
When air temperature is from 40F to 32F, heat sand or mixing water
to produce mortar temperatures between 40F and 120F.
When air temperature is from 32F to 25F, heat sand or water to
produce mortar temperatures between 40F and 120F; maintain
temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.
When air temperature is from 25F to 20F, heat sand and mixing
water to produce mortar temperatures between 40F and 120F;
maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing; use
salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under
construction; use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
When air temperature is 20F and below, heat sand and mixing water
to produce mortar temperatures between 40F and 120F; provide
enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above
32F; do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20F.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-2
Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not
being worked on:
When the mean daily air temperature is from 40F to 32F, protect
masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with
weather -resistive membrane.
When mean daily air temperature is from 32F to 25F, completely
cover masonry with weather -resistive membrane for at least 24
hours.
When mean daily air temperature is from 25F to 20F, completely
cover masonry with insulating blankets or similar protection for
at least 24 hours.
When mean daily temperature is 20 F and below, maintain masonry
temperature above 32 F for 24 hours using enclosures and
supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or
other acceptable methods.
At Contractor's option to the above protections the following may be
invoked when acceptable to the Architect:
Change to a higher type of mortar required in ASTM C 270 (if Type
N mortar is specified for normal temperature, change to Type S or
Type M).
Increase the protection time to 48 hours with no change made in
the type of mortar.
Without changing the mortar type and maintaining 24-hour
protection, replace Type I portland cement in the mortar to Type
III.
PRODUCTS
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL:
Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform
texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and
visually related areas.
BRICK:
Size: Match existing brick on NE end of existing building.
Facing Brick (FcgBrk):
Quality Standard: ASTM C 216.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-3
Wherever shown to "match existing", provide face brick of matching
color, texture and size as existing adjacent brickwork.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU):
Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of
TF__I ong x 8" (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated.
Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs,
sash, controljoints, headers, bonding and other special conditions.
Exposed Face:
Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise
., indicated.
MORTAR MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for
cold west er construction. Provide natural color or white cement as
required to produce the required mortar color.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Sand: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4", use aggregate
graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
Water: Clean, drinkable.
MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
Continuous Wire Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry:
Provide units fabricated as follows:
Truss type fabricated with single pair of 9 ga. side rods and 9
^ ga. continuous diagonal cross -rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
Anchors and Ties: Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from
not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless
otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-4
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Corrugated metal ties not less than 22 ga. and
not less than 7/8" wide and 77" long with one end crimped for
attachment to substrate. Size to extend to within 3/4" of face of
masonry veneer.
For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from Series 300
stainless steel, or hard -drawn copper or bronze.
For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with
hot -dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B1, B2, or B3.
Flashings for Masonry:
Provide flashings, as shown on drawings to match existing type, gauge,
size and shape.
Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories:
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes
shown.
Non -Metallic Expansion Joint Strips (NMExpJt): Provide premolded,
compressible, elastic fillers of foam rubber, neoprene, or extruded
plastic.
Bond Breaker Strips: 15-lb. asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D
226, of 15-lb., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Masonry Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which
masonry is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to masonry Installer.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown,
except, build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry
units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified.
Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with
clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern
shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting
wherever possible.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-5
Do not wet concrete masonry units.
Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials
mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is specified to
be wetted, comply with the BIA recommendations. Do not build on frozen
work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing.
Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or
antifreeze agents.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not
shown, lay in running bond vertical joint in each course centered on
units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units
in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each
course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown.
Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry work
with existing work, where indicated.
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns,
with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -
type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size
units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced
and coordinated with other work.
Stopping and Resuming Work:
Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course, do not tooth. Clean
exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be
wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying
fresh masonry.
Built -In Work:
As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other
sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around
built-in items.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with
mortar.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry
units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod
mortar or grout into core.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-6
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING:
Mortar Mixes: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, and of the
following types.
Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth,
interior and exterior loadbearing walls.
Use type S mortar for exterior above grade loadbearing and non-
loadbearing walls, parapet walls, pavements, and for interior
loadbearing walls and non-loadbearing partitions.
Use Type N mortar for exterior
loadbearing walls, parapet walls,
loadbearing partitions.
Batch Control:
above grade loadbearing and non -
interior loadbearing walls and non -
Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the
required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and -
maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be
permitted.
Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with
workability to provide maximum tensile bond strength within the
capacity of the mortar.
Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch
mixer. Use water clean and free of deleterious materials which would
impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if'more
than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar
during 2-1/2 hr. period as required to restore workability.
Lay brick and other solid masonry units with completely filled bed,
head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on
horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in
starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of
piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities
to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout.
Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations
required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay
walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are
to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed
joints lightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application
of caulking or sealants where shown.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-7
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh
mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which
have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units,
clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
CAVITY WALLS:
Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during
construction. Strike joints facing cavity, flush.
Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties spaced not
more than 16" o.c. vertically and 24" o.c. horizontally. Stagger in
alternate courses.
Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joint
reinforcing embedded in mortar joints at not more than 16" o.c.
vertically.
Provide weepholes in exterior wythe of cavity, composite and veneer
walls located immediately above ledges and flashing, spaced 2'-0" o.c.,_
unless otherwise indicated.
STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY:
Use individual metal ties embedded in horizontal joints to bond wythes
together. Provide ties as shown, but less than one metal tie for 4 sq.
ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24" o.c. horizontally and
vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional
ties within 1'-0" of all openings and space not more than 3'-0" apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at not more than 24" o.c. vertically.
Use continuous joint reinforcing embedded in horizontal joints for bond
tie between wythes. Install at not more than 16" o.c. vertically as
specified. Provide continuity at corners and intersections using
prefabricated "L" and "T" units.
HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING:
Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified.
Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length
with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at
other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units.
r, Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, as
otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall
intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and
bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special
conditions.
® UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-8
Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows:
For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous
horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between
wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but not less than
16" o.c. vertically.
For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically,
unless otherwise indicated.
For parapets, space reinforcing at 8" o.c. vertically.
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal
joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart,
both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend
reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging
control joints where provided.
ANCHORING MASONRY WORK:
Provide anchoring devices of the type shown as specified. If not shown
or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved.
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such
members to comply with the following:
Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry
and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space
free of mortar or other rigid materials.
Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in
masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with
flexible tie sections, unless otherwise indicated.
Space anchors as shown, but not more than 24" o.c. vertically and
36" o.c. horizontally.
Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to backing with metal ties as
follows:
Space veneer anchors as shown, or if not shown, space not more
than 24" o.c. vertically and horizontally. Provide additional
anchors within 1'-0" of openings and space not more than 3'-0"
around perimeter.
LINTELS:
Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than
1'-0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-9
Provide precast formed -in -place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure
precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support
formed -in -place lintels.
—, For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U"-
shaped lintel units with 2 - #4 reinforcing bars and filled with
Type M mortar or concrete grout.
Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'-
0" wide, and 8" for wider openings.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS:
Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry
where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry
work progresses.
See 7T-Series sections for "Sealants and Caulking".
Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each
joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at
junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.
Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified under the 7T-Series
sections.
Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown,
place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 35'-0" o.c. for concrete
masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30'-0" o.c. if not reinforced.
FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK:
Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf
angles,.lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of
water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare
masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture
flashing. Place through -wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with
mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with
^� mortar.
Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and
�. minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line
1/2" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the
outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner
wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed
work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by
furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and
turn up approximately 2".
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-10
Provide weepholes in the head joints of the same course of masonry
bedded in the flashing mortar.
Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping
deformations not less than 1-1/2" and seal lap with elastic
sealant.
Install flashings as shown on drawings.
REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING:
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken,
stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units
as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in
fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes,
except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all
joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat,
uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or -
sealant compounds.
Clean exposed brick masonry surfaces by the bucket and brush hand
cleaning method or by high pressure water method.
Use commercial cleaning agents in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY WORK 4AO-11
SECTION 5E1
I'M E K I
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions of Division-1 Specification sections apply to
work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of metal decking is indicated on drawings, including basic
layout and type of deck units required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and
standards, except as otherwise indicated or specified:
AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural -
Members".
AWS "Structural Welding Code".
SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks".
Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding
operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense
of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes will
be borne by Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work
found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross
uplift oa ing of 30 lbs. per sq. ft.
Compute the properties of metal roof deck sections on the basis of the
effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI
Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section properties
shown, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of
width.
Allowable Deflection: Design and fabricate deck for a maximum
deflections of 1/240 of the clear span under the total uniform dead and
live load.
SUBMITTALS:
METAL DECKING 5E1-1
Do no use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until
permanently secured.
Fastening Deck Units:
Fasten floor and roof deck units to steel supporting members by not
less than -1/2" diameter fusion welds or elongated welds. of equal
strength, spaced not more than 12" o.c. with a minimum of 4 welds per
unit at each support. Use welding washers where recommended by deck
mfr.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal
arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in
correcting welding work.
Lock side laps between adjacent deck units at intervals not exceeding
36" o.c. by tack welding, button punching, or mechanical fasteners.
Weld sidelaps only on decking 18 ga. and heavier.
Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories
around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as
shown.
Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and
closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and
support of other work shown.
Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension
by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fussion
welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel sheet of the same
quality as the deck units, not less than 20 ga., and at least 12" wider
and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced
not more than 12" o.c. along each side.
Touch-up Painting: After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean
and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom
surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied
in accordance with the mfr's instructions.
In areas where touch-up painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply the
paint to blend into the adjacent surfaces in a manner that will
minimize visual discontinuity in the coatings.
END OF SECTION
METAL DECKING 5E1-2
SECTION 5JO
METAL FABRICATIONS
^" GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this sections.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of metal fabrications work is shown on drawings and includes
items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips,
tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or
^� other metal systems in other sections of these specifications.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
Structural Steel: Section 5AO.
Steel Joists: Section 5A5.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
�., shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job
progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible
to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations., Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data, Metal Fabrications:
For information only, submit Z copies of manufacturer's specifications,
anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in
the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work, including paint products.
�°- Shop Drawings, Metal Fabrications:
Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous
metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections
and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchor and bolt installation by others.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-1
Samples; Metal Fabrications:
Submit 2 sets of representative samples of materials and finished
products as may be requested by the Architect. Architect's review will
be for color, texture, style, and finish only. All other requirements
for the work are the Contractor's responsibility.
PRODUCTS:
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work
which will be expose to view, use only materials which are smooth and
free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names and roughness.
Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Steel Bars and Bar -Size Shapes: ASTM A 306, Grade 65, or ASTM A 36.
Cold -Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, grade as selected by fabricator.
Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous castings,
either malleable iron ASTM A 47 or cast steel ASTM A 27. Provide
bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A 153.
FASTENERS:
General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built
into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class
required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307,
Grade A.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as
required.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-2
F_
PAINT:
Metal Primer Paint: Red lead mixed pigment, alkyd varnish, linseed oil
' paint, FS Type II; or red lead iron oxide, raw linseed oil,
alkyd paint, Steel Structures Painting Council. (SSPC) Paint 2-64; or
basic lead silico chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil, alkyd paint,
FS TT-P-615, Type II.
Primer selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint.
Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements
specified in Division 9.
FABRICATION, GENERAL:
Workmanship:
Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required
size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished
product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using
proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown_
or specified for various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to
smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
-„ impairing work.
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. At exposed connection, grind exposed welds smooth and
flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
-- concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
shown or, if not shown, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or
bolts.
A Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate
support for intended use.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to
receive finish hardware and similar items.
Galvanizing: -
Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be
galvanized, as follows:
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel
shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-3
ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.
Shop Painting:
Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of
members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be
field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified.
Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop
coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mills scale in accordance with
SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or
SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-
1 "Solvent Cleaning".
Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spay on primer in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide
uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting
methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of
paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS:
Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates:
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on
masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists,
and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive
anchor bolts and for grouting as ' required. Galvanize after
fabrication.
Loose Steel Lintels:
Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in
masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together
to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8"
bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown.
Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part
of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-4
Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or if
not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be
retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from
structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded
construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and
tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or
building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed
after concrete is placed.
Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24" o.c. and provide
minimum anchor units of 1 1/4" x 1/4" x 8" steel straps.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports.
Galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports where indicated.
Miscellaneous Steel Trim:
Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise
noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and
steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.
Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts,
fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and
installation with other work.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated.
Shelf Angles:
Provide structural steelshelfangles of sizes shown for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/8" bolts, spaced
not more than 6" from ends and not more than 24" o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete
framing.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which
miscellaneous metal items are to be installed and notify the Contractor
in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
PREPARATION:
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-5
Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete.inserts,
anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to project site.
INSTALLATION:
Setting Loose Plates:
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond -reducing
materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom
surface of bearing plates.
Set loose bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After
the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the
anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-
off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that
no voids remain.
Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting
required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set
work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level,
true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to
be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline
joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints,
but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind
exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut
or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip
galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed
field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded
metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed
areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or
spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS 5JO-6
SECTION 6G0
ARCHITECTURAL WOD RK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of architectural woodwork is shown on drawings
and in schedules.
Architectural woodwork is defined to include (inaddition to items so
designated on drawings) miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly
known as "Finish Carpentry" of "Millwork", except where specified under
® another section of these specifications.
The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarily
limited to, the following:
r- -
Casework with or for paint finish.
Plastic laminate countertops.
Refer to 8K Series sections for Wood Doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with
specified provisions of the following:
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards".
Quality Marking: Mark each unit of architectural woodwork with mill's
or a ricator s identification and grade mark, located on surfaces
which will not be exposed after installation.
CIIRMTTTAI C-
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications and installation
instructions for each item of factory -fabricated woodwork.
Quality Certification: Submit mfr's (Fabricator's) certification,
stating that the —fabricated work meets the woodwork grade(s)
specified.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item,
dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale . details, attachment
devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for the following:
Casework.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-1
Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or
pattern of architectural woodwork:
Plastic laminate; 12" square.
Exposed cabinet hardware; one unit of each type and finish.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances,
woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and
humidity requirements for woodwork installation areas. Do not install
woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to
maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent
tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation
through remainder of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork
shall determine optimum moisture content and required temperature and
humidity conditions.
PRODUCTS:
BASIC MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with following
requirements for architectural woodwork not specifically indicated as
prefabricated or prefinished standard products.
Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln -dried lumber with an average
content range of 9% to 13% for exterior work and 6% to 11% for interior
work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication,
storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for
woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the following:
Interior Wood Finish: 4%-9% for dry regions (as defined by AWI).
Wood for Painted Finish: Comply with quality standards for selection
of species, grade and cut (Fabricator's option,.except as otherwise
indicated.)
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-2
Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3; type, thickness, color,
pattern and finish as indicated for each application.
Quality Standards: For following types of architectural woodwork;
.— Comply with -in icated standards as applicable:
Casework and Countertops: AWi'Section 400.
Miscellaneous: AWI Section 700.
Design and Construction Features: Comply with details shown for
profile and construction of architectural woodwork; and, where not
otherwise shown, comply with applicable Quality Standards, with
alternate details as Fabricator's option.
Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut
openings, wherever possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings
accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams for proper size
and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops
and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required
to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify
dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would
delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field
measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TYPES:
Wood Casework, Paint Finish:
Grade: Economy, except Custom Grade drawer construction.
Exposed Portions: Provide solid wood and plywood (no plywood
substitutes-) meeting requirements for specified Quality Grade.
Plastic Laminate Countertops:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide separate plastic
aminate countertops (installed on other casework or other support
system as indicated) to comply with requirements for casework for
plastic laminate finish.
Grade: Same as casework, where casework is architectural woodwork.
FINISH FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
6GO-3
General: The priming and prefinishing (if any) of architectural
woodwork required to be performed at the shop or factory is specified
as work of this section. Refer to the 9T-Series sections for final
finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI Quality Standards, Section
00, for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, back priming and
similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
Paint Finish:
General Finish Standard: AWI Finish System No. 8, Custom Grade, closed
grain finish.
Shop Application: Sealer.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated
wlth architectural woodwork, except for units which are specified as
"door hardware" in 8S-Series sections or in other sections of these
specifications.
Hardware Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI
A156.9 American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware".
Quality Level: Type 2 (institutional), unless otherwise
indicated.
Quality Certification: Where available, provide cabinet hardware
bearing the BHMA certification label, affixed either to hardware
or its packaging, showing compliance with BHMA Cabinet Hardware
Standard 201.
Cabinet Door Hardware: Provide hinges, catches and pulls of types
indicated, to properly accommodate each door size and style.
Drawer Hardware: Provide slides and pulls of types indicated, to
properly accommodate each drawer size and style.
Equip each drawer with side -mounted, full -extension, ball -bearing,
nylon roller drawer slides.
Exposed Hardware Finish: Except where not available, provide exposed
ardware with brushed stainless steel finish as selected by Architect.
FXFrIITT M-
TNCPFrTTnN
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-4
I —
Examination: The Installer must examine substrates and conditions
under w is work is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing
of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Installer.
PREPARATION: Condition woodwork to average prevailing .humidity
conditions in installation areas prior to installing.
Pre -Installation Meeting: Meet at project site prior to delivery of
architectural woodwork and review coordination and environmental
controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in
areas to receive work. . Include in meeting the Contractor, Architect
and other Owner Representatives (if any), installers of architectural
... woodwork, wet work such as plastering, other finishes, painting,
mechanical work and electrical work, and firms or persons responsible
for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of HVAC system
as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. Proceed
with woodwork installation only when everyone concerned agrees that
required ambient conditions can be properly maintained.
Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into
substrates, well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop
fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required,
including back priming and removal of packing.
INSTALLATION: Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no
ista' ortions. shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a
tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops);
-. and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8" maximum
offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or
repair damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to
substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a
complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners
heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish
where transparent finish is indicated.
Casework: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will
fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to
center doors and drawer in openings and to provide unencumbered
�- operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items
as indicated.
Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems
as indicated.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-5
ADJUSTMENTS, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: Repair damaged and
defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally
and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments for proper
operation.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
Refer to the 9T-Series sections for final finishing of installed
architectural woodwork.
Protection: Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise
factor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to
ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective
enclosure, applied in a manner which will allow easy removal and
without damage to woodwork or adjoining work. Remove cover
immediately before time of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 6GO-6
SECTION 7G0
THERMAL INSULATION
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of thermal insulation work is shown on the drawings, by the
generic name or by its abbreviation.
The applications of thermal insulation specified in this section
include the following:
Loose cavity wall insulation.
Blanket -type building insulation specified in Section 13M1 of
these specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Thermal Conductivity: The thicknesses shown are for the thermal
conductivity -value at 75 degrees F.) specified for each material.
Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for the equivalent use of
material having a different thermal conductivity.
Fire and Insurance Rating: Comply with the fire -resistance,
�..flammability and insurance ratings indicated, and comply with governing
regulations as interpreted by authorities.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: Submit mfr's specifications and installation instructions
for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with specified requirements.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Protection from Deterioration: Do not allow insulation materials to
ecome wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with mfr's
recommendations for handling, storage and protection during
installation.
Protect plastic insulation from exposure to sunlight.
Fire Hazard: Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to the
project site ahead of installation time. Protect at all times against
ignition. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials
as rapidly as possible in each area.
THERMAL INSULATION 7GO-1
JOB CONDITIONS:
Examination of Substrate: The Installer must examine the substrate and
the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and
notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
proceed with the insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
PRODUCTS
MATERTALS:
Loose Granular Pelite Insulation: Expand aggregate; FS HH-I-574; k-
va ue oTreated with silicone for water -repellency where used in
exterior wall construction.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: Close off openings in avaties to receive
poured -in -place insulation, sufficiently to prevent excape of
insulation. Provide bronze/stainless steel screen (inside) where
openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation.
INSTALLATION:
General: Comply with mfr's instructions for the particular conditions
of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not
available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the mfr's
technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding
with the work.
Pour granular insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown.
Screed horizontal applications to uniform thicknesses indicated.
Provide either perlite or vermiculite type granular insulation at
Contractor's option.
Place loose fiber insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown,
either be pouring or by machine -blowing. Level horizontal applications
to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settled to uniform density,
but not excessively compacted.
END OF SECTION
THERMAL INSULATION 7GO-2
SECTION 7PO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is shown on
the drawings.
The following types of work are specified in this section:
Metal flashing.
-- Metal copings and scuppers.
CIIRMTTTAI C•
JOB CONDITIONS:
Do not proceed with the installation of flashing and sheet metal work
until curb and substrate construction, cant strips, blocking, and
other construction to receive the work is completed.
The Installer must examine the subtrate and the conditions under which
sheet metal work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
PRODUCTS
MIITCOTAI C.
Metal Flashing (and Counter Flashing:
Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality carbon steel sheets with
minimum o .20% copper content complying with ASTM A 526; hot -dip galv.
to comply with ASTM A 525, G90, mill phosphatised if shown to receive
paint finish, 0.0359" thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated.
Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:
For metal work, provide the type solder and fasteners recommended by
the producer of the metal sheets, for fabrication and installation.
FABRICATED PRODUCTS:
FLASHINGS AND SHEET METAL 7PO-1
Fabricated Metal Flashing, Rain Drainage and Trim:
Shop fabricate metal flashing, trim, expansion joints and similar items
to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with standard
industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual". Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldered flat -lock
seams, and fold back metal to form a hem on the concealed side of
exposed edges. Comply with metal producers' recommendations for
tinning, soldering, and cleaning flux from metal. Except as otherwise
indicated, fabricate work from the following metal:
Zinc -coated steel sheet.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with mfr's installation
instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual".
Performance: Coordinate the work with other work for the correct
sequencing of items which make up the entire membrane or system of
weatherproofing or waterproofing and rain drainage. It is requird that
the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight, and not
deteriorate in excess of mfr's published limitations.
INSTALLATION OF METAL WORK:
Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply with SMACMA
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of
the work.
Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding
15'-0" running length, except as otherwise indicated.
Reduce above spacing to 30'-0" for aluminum or zinc alloy valleys
and gutters.
Flashing and Trim: 10'-0" maximum spacing, and located 2'-0" from
corners and intersections.
Fasten flashings as shown. Anchor by mechanical means, spaced 2'-0".
Seal the joint with sealant.
Refer to 7TO Series sections for sealants.
Fabricate, support and anchor rain drainage in a manner which will
withstand thermal expansion stresses and full loading by water or ice,
without damage, deterioration or leakage.
END OF SECTION
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 7PO-2
SECTION 7P2
METAL GUTTERS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of metal gutter work, also referred to as "rain drainage",
is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section.
The following types of work are specified in this section:
Built-in gutters (set into deck surface).
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: Submit metal mfr's and fabricator's specifications,
installation instructions and general recommendations for rain drainage
applications.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing manner of forming,
jointing and securing metals to form rain drainage units. Show
expansion joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining work
-- and at obstructions and penetrations in rain drainage work.
JOB CONDITIONS:
coordinate rain drainage work with roofing, flashing, trim and the
construction of decks, parapets, eaves, cornices, walls and other
adjoining work, to provide a permanently leak -proof, secure and non-
corrosive installation.
PRODUCTS
MATFRTAI C-
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide commercial quality carbon steel sheet
with minimum of 0.20°° copper content, complying with ASTM A 526; hot -
dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 525, designation G90, mill
phosphatized except where indicated to remain unpainted; of thicknesses
�- shown.
Miscellaneous Materials:
METAL GUTTERS
7P2-1
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide types of fasteners,
so er, welding rods, coatings, separators, sealants and accessory
items as recommended by sheet metal mfrs for rain drainage work.
Solder for Rain Drainage: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 50%
in - 50% lead solde-T-w-Tit-F rosin flux, ASTM B 32; for soldering, zinc -
coated steel.
Fasteners and Anchors: Same metal as rain drainage, or other metal as
recommended by mfr. of metal units for improved corrosion resistance.
Cleats and Straps: Same metal as rain drainage work being anchored or
supported; gage as indicated.
Roofing Cement: FS SS-C-153, type which is compatible with substrate
and adjoining work. Provide type which is nominally free of sulfur.
Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphaltic coating, FS TT-C-494, Type
11, compounded for min. thickness per coat of 15 mils (dry). Provide
type which is nominally free of sulfur.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by metal sheet mfr;
complying wit-S-00227, FF TT-2-00230, OR FF TT-2-001543.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene (plain or modified) non -hardening,
non -migrating, non-skinning,k non-drying mastic sealant.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Mfr's standard 2-part non -corrosive metal seam
cementing compound, recommended for exterior and interior non-mo.ving
joints in rain drainage including riveted joints.
FABRICATION:
General: The fabrication requirements for rain drainage work apply to
both shop -fabricated and on -site -fabricated work. Shop fabricate work
to greatest extent possible.
Fabrication Standard: Fabricate work as shown and, where not otherwise
shown, tabricate o comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
MAnual" and other recognized industry standards.
Mfr's Recommendations: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply
wit recommendations and instructions of the mfr. of sheet metal being
fabricated.
Provide for thermal expansion of running gutters and other items
exposed for more than 15'-0" continuous length. Maintain a water -tight
seal at expansion joints. Locate expansion joints as shown or, if not
shown, midway between drains (at high points in slopes), but in no case
more than the following maximum spacings:
Steel: 50'-0" max. spacing for steel and coated steel (incl.
terne, if any).
METAL GUTTERS 7P2-2
Mastic -Type Expansion Joints: Form hooked ends on rain drainage
members, tor not less than embedment in joints filled with mastic
sealant, with mastic completely concealed in joints.
Elastomeric Sealant -filled Joints: Where elastomeric joints are
indicated within rain drainage or at interfaces with other work, form
sheet metal to provide proper shapes and sizes of sealant beads, with
adequate joint bond surfaces.
Epoxy Cemented Seams:-- Where fixed seams or joints require sealing or
cementing to ensure waterproofness or adequate strength, form r5ain
drainage properly and install epoxy seam sealer in accordance with
�-- mfr's instruction.
Fabricate work with lines and corners of exposed units true and
accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves
and avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal.
Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds and
sealant. Except as otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form hem
on concealed side of exposed edges.
Provide strainer units at outlets of gutters and conductor heads,
fabricated of wire or wire mesh which -is non -corrosive and compatible
with sheet metal, with minimum 0.062" diameter wire and maximum 1/2"
spacing or wires, in a bee -hive design unless otherwise indicated.
Support and Anchorage: Fabricate units with adequate provisions for
support and anchorage, of types needed for indicated method of
installation.
Seaming and Soldering: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rain
rainage wit flat -lock soldered seams.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with mfr's recommendations and installation
instruct Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual".
Separate dissimilar metals from each other, and separate metals from
corrosive substrates. Paint each metal surface in area of contact with
a 15-mil (dry thickness) application of bituminous coating, or apply a
troweled -in -place coating of roofing cement, or provide other permanent
separation as recommended by mf rs of the metals.
-- Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed
work and locate so as to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and
seal work as required for a tight installation.
METAL GUTTERS 7P2-3
Provide concealed cleat -type anchorage where practical, or exposed
strap -type anchors where shown, arranged to relieve stresses in
rain drainage work resulting from building movement and thermal
expansion.
Sealant -type Expansion Joints: When ambient temp. is moderate at time
of installation 40 to 70 deg. F), set joint members for 50% movement
either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation higher
ambient temp. Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below
40 Deg. F. Comply with sealant mfr's instructions.
Bed flashing flanges in a bed of roofing cement or other setting
compound which is compatible with adjoining work and substrate.
On vertical overlaps, lap sheet metal a min. of 3".
Support and anchor each unit of work in manner indicated; as
recognized to be adequate for thermal expansion stresses and normal
loading of water, ice, wind and similar loadings.
Install units of rain drainage work with lines and corners true and
accurate in alignment and location.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances which might cause corrosion,
or which might interfere with uniform weathering of finish.
Zinc -Coated Steel Rain Drainage: Touch-up abraded areas, where zinc
coating has been damaged, with a 2-mil (dry thickness) coating, with a
high concentration of zinc dust, complying with Mil-P-21035,
specifically intended for repair of zinc coatings on steel.
Painting Rain Drainage:
General: Painting of installed rain drainage is specified in painting
sections of these specifications.
PROTECTION OF RAIN DRAINAGE WORK:
The Installer of rain drainage work shall advise Contractor of required
provisions for surveillance and protection of installed work during
remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION
METAL GUTTERS 7P2-4
SECTION 7T0
JOINT SEALERS
�- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the contract, including general and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and by
provisions of this section.
The required applications include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the following:
Exterior building wall joints.
Flashing and coping joint.
Miscellaneous concrete construction joints.
Partition and ceiling joints.
Equipment and isolation joints.
Gasketing for assembly of components.
JOB CONDITIONS: Installer must examine joint surfaces and backing, and
their anchorage to the structure, and conditions under which joint
sealer work is to be performed, and notify Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work and performance
of sealers. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under
adverse weat er conditions, or when temperatures are below or above
mfr's recommended temperature range for installation. Proceed with the
work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper
cure and development of high early bond strength. Where joint width is
affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric
sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of mfr's recommended
installation temperature range.
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not
indicated, ed, as selected by Architect from mfr's standard colors. For
concealed materials, provide natural color which has best overall
performance characteristics.
Hardness: As recommended by mfr. for application shown, unless
of-Terwi se indicated.
Modules of Elasticity: Provide the lowest available modules of
e asticity w ich is consistent with exposure to weathering,
indentation, vandalism, abrasion, support of loading, and other
requi rements .
Compatibility: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its
compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in joint
system.
Size and Shape: As shown or, if not shown, as recommended by mfr. for
type and condition of joint, and for indicated joint performance or
movement.
Grade of Sealant: For each application, provide grade of sealant (non -
sag, se eveling, no -track, knife grade, preformed, etc.) as
recommended by mfr. for particular condition of installation (location,
joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar condition), to achieve
best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for
normal condition of installation.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
One -Component Polysulfide Sealant: Polysulfide based, one -part
e astomeric sealant complying wit FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type II
(non -sag) unless Type I recommended by mfr. for application shown.
One -Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane -based, one -part
e astomeric sealant, complying wit S TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I
(self-eleveling) unless Type II recommended by mfr. for application
shown.
Modified Sealant: Where shown as "Modified One -Component Polyurethane
Sealant", provide mfr's bituminous -modified compound, recommended for
compatibility in application indiciated.
Exterior Silicone Rubber Sealant: Silicone rubber -based, one -part
e astomeric sealant, complying wit FS S-001543, Class A; recommended
by mfr. for e.xte ri or joints.
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-2
— Provide non-acid, porous -bond type silicone rubber sealant where
one or both joint faces are masonry, stone, concrete or other
porous materials.
t..
Provide acid, nonporous -bond type silicone rubber sealant where
both joint faces are metal, glass, plastic or other non -porous
material.
Mildew Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: Silicone rubber -based, one -
part a astomeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S-001543, Class A;
compounded specifically for mildow resistance and recommended by mfr
for interior joints in wet areas; passing ANSI A136.1 test for mold
growth.
NON-ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS AND CAULKING COMPOUNDS:
One -Component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent -based, one -
part, t ermo-plastic sealant compound; solids not less than 95%
acrylic; complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class B, Type II, recommended by
mfr. for general use as an exposed building construction sealant.
r
Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Acrylic -emulsion or latex -rubber -modified
acrylic -emulsion sealant compound permanently flexible, non -staining
and non -bleeding; recommended by mfr. for protected exterior exposure
and general interior exposure.
Butyl Rubber Sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers
pigments , so vent- ased with minimum 75% solids, non -sag consistency,
tack -free time of 24 hours or less, paintable; non -staining; complying
with TT-S-001657.
Oleo -Resinous Caulking Compound: Oil -based resinous caulking compound
complying with FS TT-C-00598 non -staining, non -bleeding, paintable.
JOINT FILLERS, PAVEMENT TYPES:
Bituminous and Fiber Joint Filler: Provide resilient and non -extruding
type premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with
ASTM D 1751, FS HH-F-341, Type I and AASHTO M 213.
CELLULAR/FOAM JOINT FILLERS:
Expanded Polyethylene Joint Filler: Provide flexible, compressible,
closed -cell, polyethylene of not less than 10 psi compression
deflection (25%); except provide higher compression deflection strength
as may be necessary to withstand installation forces and provide proper
support for sealants; surface water absorption of not more than 0.1
.., lbs. per sq. ft.
GASKETS:
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-3
Mol ded PVC Gasket: Provide flexible extruded polyvinyl chloride
gaskets of hardness and profile shown or, if not shown, as required by
joint shape, size and movement characteristics to maintain a watertight
and airtight seal, complying with ASTM D 2287.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended
y sealant mfr. for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended by sealant mfr. to be applied to sealant -contact surfaces
where bond to substrate of joint filler must be avoided for proper
performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever
applicable.
Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam
polyethylene jacket polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene
foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non -absorptive material as
recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant mfr.
EXECUTION
MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS:
Comply with mfr's printed instructions except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where mfr's technical
representative directs otherwise.
JOINT PREPARATION:
Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or
caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other
substances which wold interfere with bond of sealant or caulking
compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by
sealant mfr. Roughen vitreous or glazed joint surfaces as recommended
by sealant mfr.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where shown or recommended by sealant mfr.
Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
INSTALLATION:
Set joint filler units at proper depth or position in joint to
coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers,
backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of
joint filler units.
Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric.sealants, except
where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant mfr.
for application shown.
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-4
Install bond breaker tape where shown and where required by mfr's
recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform
properly.
r-.
Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that
sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps
or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally
on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet
to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.
Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical
^-� surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap
moisture and dirt.
Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by
sealant mfr. but within the following general limitations, measured at
center (thin) section of bead:
For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with
elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and
indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of
�^ joint width, but neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8"-
deep.
For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not
subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint
width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep.
For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking
compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint
width.
Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto
adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.
Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to
eliminate evidence of spillage.
Recess exposed edges of gaskets and joint fillers slightly behind
adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units
will not protrude from joints.
Bond ends of gaskets together with adhesive or "weld" by other means as
recommended by mfr. to ensure continuous watertight and airtight
performance. Miter -cut and bond ends at corners unless molded corner
units are provided.
CURE AND PROTECTION: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in
compliance with mfr's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high
early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection of
joint sealers 'during construction period, so that they will be without
deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time
of Owner's acceptance.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALERS 7TO-5
SECTION i
1 o] 60 19 1l
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work
specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of custom hollow metal work is shown on the drawings and
schedules.
This section includes custom hollow metal doors, custom pressed steel
frames for doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Provide custom hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm
specializing in the production of this type of work, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit mfr's specifications for fabrication and
installation, including data substantiating that products comply with
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection
during transit and job storage.
Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may
be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new
work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units
on at least 4" high wood sills or on floors in a manner that will
prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non -vented plastic or canvas
shelters which could create a humidity chamber. If the cardboard
wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. provide 1/4'
spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel,
pickles and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568.
Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying
with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial
quality, complying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating,
mill phosphatized.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gage sheet metal.
Galvanize after fa rication units to be built into exterior walls,
complying with ASTM A153, Class B.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Mfr's standard units, except hot -dip
galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM
A153, Class C or D as applicable.
Shop -Applied Paint: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying
or a ing, suita a as base for specified finish paints on steel__
surfaces.
I:::10y1KIPis
Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free
from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes
and profiles. Wherever practicable,
fit and assemble units in the mfr's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory -assembled before shipment, to assure
proper assembly at the project site. Weld exposed joints continuously;
grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Metallic filler
to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk
flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts.
Finish Hardware Preparation:
Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish
hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in
accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided
by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115
series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-2
Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface -applied hardware.
Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at
project site.
Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings, or if not
shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's
Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting:
Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of fabricated hollow metal
units, including galvanized surfaces, but excluding stainless steel
surfaces.
Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other
foreign materials before application of paint.
Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate
solution (SSPC-PT2), hot phosphate solution (SSPC-PT4) or basic zinc
chromate -vinyl butyral solution (SSPC-PT3).
Apply shop coat of prime paint within time limits recommended by
pretreatment mfr. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.
DOORS:
General: Provide flush design doors, 1-3/4" thick, seamless hollow
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
For single -acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8" in
211. .
Unless otherwise required for acoustical or thermal assemblies, provide
filler of fiberboard, mineral -wool board, or other insulating material
solidly packed full door height to fill voids between inner core
reinforcing members.
Painted Interior Doors: Fabricate interior doors of 2 outer, cold -
rolled, stretc er-leveled steel sheets not less than 18 gage.
Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces, without visible joints or
seams on exposed faces or stile edges, except around glazed or louvered
panel inserts.
Reinforce inside of doors with vertical, hot -rolled, not less than 22
gage steel sections. Space vertical reinforcing 6" o.c. and extend
full door height. Spot-weld at not more than 5" o.c. to both face
sheets.
Continuous truss -form inner core of 28 gage sheet metal
reinforcing may be provided as inner reinforcement in lieu of
above. Spot-weld truss -form reinforcement 3" o.c. vertically and
horizontally over entire surface of both sides.
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-3
Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 18 gage, horizontal steel
channels, welded continuously to outer sheets.
Finish Hardware Reinforcement:
Reinforce doors for required finish hardware, as follows:
Hinges: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide x 6" longer than
hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot-welds.
Mortise Locksets and Dead Bolts: 14 gage steel sheet, secured
with not less than 2 spot-welds.
® Cylinder Locks: 12 gage steel sheet, secured with not less than 2
spot-welds.
Flush Bolts: 12 gage steel sheet, secured with not less than 2
spot-welds.
Surface -Applied Closers: 12 gage steel sheet, secured with not
less than 6 spot-welds.
Push Plates and Bars: 16 gage steel sheet, (except when through
bolts are shown or specified), secured with not less than 2 spot
welds.
FRAMES: Provide hollow metal frames for doors, side -lights, borrowed
iT gilts, and other openings, of size and profile as indicated.
Fabricate frames of full -welded unit construction, with corners
mitered, reinforced, continuously welded full depth and width of frame,
unless otherwise indicated.
Form frames of galvanized steel sheets for exterior, and either cold or
hot -rolled sheet steel for interior.
Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Reinforce frames for required finish
hardware, as follows:
Hinges and Pivots: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide x 6"
longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot-welds.
Strike Plate Clips: Steel plate 3/16" thick x 1-1/2" wide x 3"
ong.
Surface -Applied Closers: 12 gage steel sheet, secured with not
less than 6 spot-welds.
r-
Concealed Closers: 12 ga. steel sheet, secured with not less than
spot-welds.
Head Reinforcing: Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions
in frames open at top for grouting.
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-4
Jamb Anchors: Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure frames to
a Jacent construction, formed of not less than 18 gage galvanized
steel.
Masonry Construction: Adjustable, flat, corrugated, or
perforated, t-s aped to suit frame size, with leg not less than 2"
wide by 10" long. Furnish at least 3 anchors per jamb up to 7'-6"
height; 4 anchors up to 8'-0" jamb height; one additional anchor
for each 24" or fraction thereof over 8'-0" height.
In -Place Concete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8"
concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts at 6" from top
and bottom and 26" o.c., unless otherwise shown. Reinforce frames
at anchor locations. Apply removable stop to cover anchor bolts
unless otherwise indicated.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which
extends to floor, formed of not less than 14 gage galvanized steel
sheet, as follows:
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with 2 holes to
receive Tasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions.
Head Strut Supports: Provide 3/8" x 2" vertical steel struts extending_
from top-o rame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless
frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each
jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to
supporting construction above. Provide adjustable bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames,
tack we ed to jambs and mullions.
Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped doors, drill stop to
receive si encers on single -door frames. Install plastic plugs to
keep holes clear during construction.
Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or dust cover
boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar
or other materials might obstruct hardware installation.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS: Form fixed stops and molding integral with frame,
unless otherwise indicated.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which hollow
metal work is to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of
any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-5
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with mfr's
data, and as herein specified.
Setting Masonry Anchorage Devices:
Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for securing hollow
metal frames to in -place concrete or masonry construction.
Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance
with details on final shop drawings and anchorage device mfr's
instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free
from dust and debris.
Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of
masonry anchorage devices and machine screws.
Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned,
and brace_d_securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving_.
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
Protective Coating: In masonry construction, building -in of anchors
and grouting of frames is included in Division 4 sections of these
specifications.
At in -place concrete masonry construction, set frames and secure
in place with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been
properly set and secured.
Door Installation:
Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, with the
following clearances:
Jambs and Head: 3/32".
Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8" .
ottom: , where not res old or carpet.
Bottom: 1/8", at threshold or carpet.
Finish hardware installation is specified under Division 8 hardware
sections.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK 8J1-6
Final Adjustments:
in hol low metal work
complete and proper
work, including doors
unacceptable.
Check and readjust operating finish hardware items
just prior to final inspection. Leave work in
operating condition. Remove and replace defective
or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise
Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any
ruste or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible
air -drying primer.
END OF SECTION
CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK
8J1-7
SECTION 8KO
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general provision of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the
drawings and in schedules sometimes by the abbreviation WdW or other
abbreviations as indicated herein.
The types of doors required include the following:
Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces.
Factory -fitting to frames (prefitting) and factory -preparation for
hardware (prmachining) for wood door is included in this section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
General: Comply with the requirements of the following standards
un ess otherwise indicated.
Non -fire Rated Wood Doors: NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1 "Wood Flush
Doors" of the Nationa oo work Mfr's Assoc.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: Submit door mfr's product data specifications and
installation instructions for each type of wood door required,
including other data as may be required to show compliance with
specified requirements. Transmit copy of each instruction to the
Installer.
Warranty: Submit written agreement in door mfr's standard form signed
yb the Mfr., Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show
photographing of construction below in face veneers, or do not conform
to tolerance limitations of NWMA.
PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING:
�- Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On -Site Care"
recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and finishing of Wood Doors" and
_ with mfr's instructions.
WOOD DOORS 8KO-1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
General: Provide wood doors complying with the applicable requirements
ofNWMAI .S.1 for the kinds and types of doors indicated and as further
specified.
Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3-ply face panels, unless
otherwise indicated.
Exposed Surfaces: Provide the kind shown or scheduled and as
further specified. Provide same exposed surface material on both
faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated.
GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS:
INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
Solid Core Wood Doors:
Type II water-resistant bond.
Core Construction: Solid wood block, wood particleboard, or mineral
with wood locklocks, as required by door mfr. to comply with
specified warranty period.
Face Panels: Mfr's standard 2- or 3-ply face panels.
Exposed Surfaces for Transparent Finish: Where solid core interior
wood doors are shown or sc eduled to receive a transparent finish,
provide mfr's standard thickness face veneers of the following quality.
Quality: NWMA I.S.1 Good grade face veneers of the species and
cut or scheduled. Sharp contrast not permitted at veneer
joints. Provide exposed edges and other exposed solid wood
components of any species of wood.
PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE:
Prefit and premachine wood doors at the factory.
Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for prefitting. Machine
doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final
hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware
templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit
of doors and hardware.
Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal
frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with
machining in the factory.
WOOD DOORS 8KO-2
EXECUTION
T RIC'r% /`TT Ml.
Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are the
correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of
corresponding doors and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area
prior to hanging.
Hardware: For installation see 8S-Series sections of these
specifications.
Mfr's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with mfr's
instructions and as shown.
Prefit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever
extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and
uniform clearance at each edge.
Clearance: For non -fire doors provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and
heads; an 1/2" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish
or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4"
clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections of these specs. for
requirements for finishing wood doors.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate
freely, as directed by the Architect.
Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation,
as directed by the Architect.
Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures
required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or
deterioration until acceptance of the work.
END OF SECTION
WOOD DOORS 8KO-3
SECTION 8SO
BUILDERS HARDWARE
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions
Supplementary Conditions and General
this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
of Contract, including General and
Requirements, apply to work of
Definition: "Builders Hardware" includes items shown on the drawings
and in schedule and includes all items known commercially as builders
hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors,
except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in
the same section as the door and door frame.
The required types of builders hardware include
necessarily limited to) the following:
Butts and hinges
Lock cylinders and keys
Lock and latch sets
Bolts
Panic exit devices
Closers
Door trim units
Stripping and seals
Thresholds
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
(but are not
Acceptable Mfrs: The last article of this section indicates acceptable
mfrs for the primary items of builders hardware. Mfr's products which
comply with the indicated requirements are acceptable for other items.
Mfr.: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges,
c o es rs, etc.) from only one mfr.
Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been
furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less
than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant
who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work,
for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
Departures From Scheduled Designations: Except as otherwise indicated,
the use o one m r s numeric designation system in schedules does not
imply that another mfr's products will not be acceptable, unless they
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-1
are not acceptable in design, or not equal in size, weight, finish,
function, or other quality of significance. However, do not change the
selection after Architect's acceptance of hardware supplier's completed
hardware schedule.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit mf is technical information for each item of
�.,hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show
compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation
and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. Wherever needed,
furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to recieve
finish hardware. Transmit copy of applicable,data to the Installer.
Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior
to delivery of hardware, submit one sample of each exposed hardware
unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for
coordination with the schedule. Sample will be reviewed by the
Architect for design, color and teture only. Compliance with other
requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units which are
acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and
field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation,
be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination
requi rements.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of
the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier form
the various mfrs, sort and repackage in containers marked with the
hardware set number. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the
same container.
Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware
supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the
count is correct.
Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not
yet installed. Control the handling andinstallation of hardware items
which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the
work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after
installation.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or
package separately, with identification related to the final hardware
schedule, and include basic installation instruction in the package.
Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of
the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-2
indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver
individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper
locations (shop or project site) for installation.
Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors,
frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of
hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for the, proper installation
of hardware.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
General:
Hand of Door: The drawings show the direction of slide, swing or hand
of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper
installation and operation of the door movement as shown.
Mfr's Name Plate: Do not use mfr's products which have mfr's name or
trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates),
except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
Mfrs identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders
only.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming
method indicated, using the mfr's standard metal alloy, composition,
temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized)
quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF-H-
106, FS FF-G-111, FS FF-H-116 and FS FF-H-121. Do not furnish
"optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified.
Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide
hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws,
except as specifically indicated.
Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish
exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of
such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint"
in surfaces to receive painted finish.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when
the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type
specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-3
..� bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite
face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to
adequately reinforce the work.
Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as
needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of builders hardware.
HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS:
Templates and Screws: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed
entirely both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only
template -produced units.
Hinge Pins : Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as
follows:
Out -swing Corridor Doors: Non -removable pins.
nterior Doors: Non -rising pins.
Tips: Flat -button and matching plug, finished to match leaves,
except where hosiptal tip (HT) indicated.
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING:
General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements
an�o6tain final instructions in writing.
Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required
(master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster), either new or integrated
with Owner's existing system.
Equip locks with mfr's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless
steel or nickel silver.
Comply with the Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as
otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which
is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
Key Material: Provide keys of nickle silver only.
Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for
each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
Deliver keys to Owner's representative.
Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index,
temporary markers, pemanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as
recommended by system mfr., with capacity for 150% of the number of
locks required for the project.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-4
Key control mfr. to set up complete cross index system and place
keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the
final key schedule.
Provide hinged -panel type cabinet, for wall mounting.
PUSH/PULL UNITS:
Exposed Fasteners: Provi de
installation; through -bolted for
units.
HARDWARE FINISHES:
mfr's standard exposed fasteners for
matched pairs, but not for single
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening,
to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated.
Reduce differences in color and texturs as much as commercially
possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for
individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In
general, match items to the mfr's standard finish for the latch and
lock set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock sets) for color and
texture.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating
(if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with
mfr's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable
units of hardware by FS FF-H-106, FS FF-H-111, FS FF-H-116 and FS FF-H-
121.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and
Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to
comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise
directed by Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the mfr's instructions
and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to
install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or
finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation
or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in
the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until
finishes have been completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and
reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation
and operation.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-5
Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for
anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with
industry standards.
Cut and fit threshold to profile of door frames, with mitered corners
and hair -line joints join units with concealed welds or concealed
mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar
items, if any.
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the
r. proper type for permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel
which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal.
On heavy-duty cast metal thresholds, provide not less than 3/8"
diam. screw anchors.
At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in a bed
—, of either butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant to
completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source.
Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the
application made.
Final Adjustment: Whereve hardware installation is made more than one
moth prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or are, return to the
work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final
check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and
finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of
hardware.
Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the
acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the
representative of the latch and lock mfr., shall return to the project
and re -adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of
-- doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in
recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware
items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials
or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current
and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of
the hardware.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-6
BUILDERS HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1989 PAWS/ANIMAL CONTROL ADDITIONS
SOUTHWEST ADDITION
Heading 1
Doors 1
Each to have:
1 1/2 pr. Butts
TZ2714 US26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
NRP McKinney
1 Lockset
28-8G26 OB US26D
Sargent
1 Closer
EN350-0
Sargent
1 Stop
W1276CS US26D
Trimco
1 Threshold
170A
Pemko
1 Door Sweep
18A-125
Pemko
1 Set w/Stipping
45A-062
Pemko
NORTHWEST ADDITION
Heading 1
Doors 1
Each to have:
1 1/2 pr Butts
TA2714 US26D 4 1/2x4 1/2 NRP
McKinney
1 Exit Device
8804 PTB US26D
Sargent
1 Door Closer
EN350-P9
Sargent
1 Kickplate
10"x34" US32D
Trimco
1 Stop
1201-5 US26D
Trimco
1 Threshold
182A
Pemko
1 Door Sweep
18A-125
Pemko
1 set w/St ripping
45A-062
Pemko
Heading 2
Doors 2
Each to have:
1 1/2 pr Butts
TA2714 US26D 4 1/2x4 1/2 NRP
McKinney
1 Lockset
28-8G37 OB US26D
Sargent
1 Stop
W1276CCS US26D
Trimco
3 Silencers
1229A
Trimco
Heading 3
Doors 3-4
Each to have:
1 1/2 pr Butts TA2714 US26D 4 1/2x4 1/2 McKinney
1 Lockset 28-8G44 OB US26D Sargent
BUILDERS HARDWARE 8SO-7
�- Heading 4
Door 5
Each to have:
1 1/2 pr Butts TA2714 US26D 4 1/2x4 1/2 NRP
1 Lockset 28-8G04 OB US26D
1 Stop W1276CCS US26D
3 Silencers 1229A
END OF SECTION
BUILDERS HARDWARE
McKinney
Sargent
Trimco
Trimco
SECTION •
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of predecorated gypsum board work is shown on the drawings
and in schedules.
The types of predecorated gypsum board required include the following:
Vinyl -film -faced gypsum board panels.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Allowable Tolerance: 1/16" offsets between planes of board faces, and
in 8 -0 for plumb, level, warp and bow.
Manufacturer: Obtain predecorated gypsum boards, trim accessories,
adhesives and joint products from a single mfr., or from mfrs
recommended by the prime mfr of gypsum boards.
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's product
specs ications and installation instructions for each predecorated
component, including maintenance instructions and other data as may be
required to show compliance with these specifications. Distribute an
additional copy of each installation instruction to the Installer.
Samples: Submit 3, 12" sq. samples of each color and texture of
predecorated gypsum board required, and 3 units of 24" lengths of each
predecorated accessory or trim strip required with each board
selection. Sample submittal and Architect's review will be for color,
pattern and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified
with mfr's name, brand, type and grade; store in a dry, well ventilated
space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground.
JOB CONDITIONS:
PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-1
Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive
predecorated gypsum board, and the conditions under which the work is
to be performed, and shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of
conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
PRODUCTS
PREDECORATED MATERIALS:
Vinyl -Faced Gypsum Boards: Gypsum board of the thickness indicated
complying with , with factory -laminated vinyl face.
Vinyl Face: Unsupported vinyl film, not less than 6 mils thick.
Vinyl Face: Vinyl film not less than 6 mils thick, on cloth
acking.
Long Edge Profile: Modified bevel, with vinyl film wrapped around
to back.
Long Edge Profile: Tapered and rounded edges, with non -laminated
integral vinyl flaps extending beyond edges (for trimming).
Thickness: 112", except as otherwise indicated.
Texture and Color: As selected by Architect from mfr's standard
textures and colors.
Mfr.: The following produce vinyl -faced gypsum board panels
complying with the requirements:
The Flintkote, co.; Georgia-Pacific Corp.; Gold Bond Building
Products Div.; Kaiser Gypsum Co.; US Gypsum Co.
Predecorated Trim Accessories: Mfr's standard units of the type and
profile indicated, matching the finish color, pattern and texture of
the predecorated gypsum board.
Snap-On Type: Galvanized retainer strips and snap -on predecorated
molded plastic trim strips, including external corner strips.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Joint Treatment Materials: Drywall joint compound complying with ASTM
, ot the type recommended by the predecorated gypsum board mfr.
Concealed Fasteners: Types and sizes recommended by predecorated
gypsum board m r, but not less than screw -type fasteners where board is
over metal supports.
PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-2
Adhesives: Provide types of laminating and fastening adhesives
recommended by predecorated gypsum board mfr.; either liquid form or
preformed foam -tape adhesives.
Matching Vinyl: Provide vinyl film in roll -goods form, matching vinyl
ace of predecorated gypsum board, as required to cover substrates
which are indicated to match but cannot be successfully covered with
predecorated board.
EXECUTION
PREPARATIONS FOR INSTALLATION:
Pre -Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the
installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing
of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum board has
been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings,
supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been
completed.
Plan layout and coordination of exposed joints to provide best visual
effect within each space, and to coordinate with building expansion
joints and other interruptions of the work.
INSTALLATION OF PREDECORATED BOARDS: -
General: Comply with mfr's instructions and recommendations which are
applicable to, the work indicated, except where more stringent
requirements are indicated or required by governing regulations or for
indicated fire -resistance ratings or STC ratings.
Isolate perimeter of work from abutment with structure, by use of space
and trim accessories of the types indicated.
Install wall and partitions boards with vertical joints, and stagger
joints with joints in backing boards where multi -layered applications
are indicated. For single -layered applications, stagger joints with
joints on opposite side of partitions.
Install vinyl -faced boards by nailing or screwing to supports only
where fasteners will be concealed by applied base or trim, and by
adhesive fastening of board to other supports and substrate areas.
Exposed Butt -Joint System: Except where top, bottom and edges can
e astened with concealed fasteners, fasten boards entirely with
adhesive. Butt exposed edges tightly without forcing, for uniform
appearance of seams.
Matched Finish Areas: Where indicated and where wall surfaces are
excessively disrupted by penetrating services or unusual profiles which
cannot be successfully covered by predecorated gypsum board, install
PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-3
plain gypsum board or backing board of same thickness, including
drywall treatment or joints and fasteners as may be necessary to
produce a smooth, joint -free base for finishing.
.�- Cover area with adhesively applied matching vinyl wallcovering,
with seams coordinated to produce best possible visual effect.
Install predecorated trim accessories where shown and elsewhere as
indicated to conceal fasteners and board edges, and comply with mfr's
instructions for securing trim units and jointing trim at intersections
and joints in running trim. Provide trim in lengths (longest lengths
available) which will minimize the number of running trim joints.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Save scraps of predecorated board which are more than 8" wide and more
than 3 sq. ft. in area, and save scraps of predecorated trim
accessories which are more than 2' long. Wrap or bundle scraps for
storage, and deliver as directed to Owner's representative.
Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from
-� installation.
Ma
Clean dust, excess adhesive, marks and other compounds and stains from
exposed faces of the work; comply with mfr's instructions.
Protections: The Installer of predecorated gypsum board shall advise
the Contractor of required procedures for protection of the work from
damage and deteri orati on du ri ng the remainder of the construction
period.
END OF SECTION
PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD 9C7-4
SECTION 9DO
GYPSUM DRYWALL
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the
work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of the gypsum drywall work (GypDw) is shown on the drawings
and in schedules, and is hereby defined to include gypsum board work
with a tape -and -compound joint treatment system known as "drywall
finishing" work.
The types of work required include the following:
Gypsum drywall including screw -type metal support system.
Drywall finishing (joint tape -and -compound treatment).
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Industry Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of GA-216
"Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" by the Gypsum Association,
except where more detailed or more stringent requirements are indicated
including the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and
in - or p umb, level, warp and bow.
Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum boards, trim accessories, adhesives and
joint treatment products from a single manufacturer, or from
manufacturer's recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.
61"'. zwillll
Manufacturer's Data, Gypsum Drywall:
For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's product
specifications and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall
component, including other data as may be required to show compliance
with these specifications. Distribute an additional copy of each
installation instruction to the Installer.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver gypsum drywall materials in sealed containers and bundles,
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-1
fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade; store
in a dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under
cover and off the ground.
-, JOB CONDITIONS:
Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum
drywall, and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be
installed; and shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55 degrees F., for the
period of 24 hours before drywall finishing, during installation and
until compounds are dry.
PRODUCTS
METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS:
General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with Gypsum
ssA ociation Specification GA-203 "Installation of Screw -Type Steel
Framing Members to Receive GypsumBoard" (as specified and recommended)
for metal system supporting gypsum drywall work.
Studs: ASTM C 645; 25 gage X 3-5/8" deep, except as otherwise
1 ndi Gated.
Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for
floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of
drywall work at other work.
Stud System Accessories: Provide stud manufacturer's standard
cl ips, shoes , ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other
accessories as needed for a complete stud system.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 25 gage, hat -shaped.
Fasteners: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for
the substrate and application indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:
General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with GA-216 as
specified and recommended.
Exposed Gypsum Board (GypBd): (Also known as gypsum wallboard.)
�- Regular type with tapered long edges.
Edge Profile: Special rounded or beveled edge.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
9DO-2
Sheet Size: Maximum length available which will minimize end
joints.
Thickness: 1/2", except where otherwise indicated.
TRIM ACCESSORIES:
General: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel beaded units with
aT1 nges for concealment in joint compound, including corner beads, edge
trim and control joint; except provide semi -finishing type (flange not
concealed) where indicated.
Exterior Trim: Zinc -alloy, except as otherwise indicated.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the
application indicated, except as otherwise indicated.
Joint Tape: Perforated type.
Joint Compound: Ready -mixed vinyl -type for interior use. -
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the
type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically
recommended for laminating gypsum boards.
Gypsum Board Fasteners: Comply with GA-216.
Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Mastic type; non -shrinking, non-drying,
non -migrating and non -staining.
Exposed Acoustical Sealant: Latex, acrylic, or acrylic -latex type;
permanently elastic and paintable.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: FS HH-I-521, Type I; semi -rigid mineral
fiber blanket without membrane, Class 25 flame -spread, thicknesses as
indicated.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with GA-203,
and manufacturer's instructions.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-3
Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips, and similar devices
to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for
coordination with other work.
Do not bridge building expansion joints (ExpJt) with support system,
frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated.
Isolate stud system from transfer to structural loading to system, both
horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to
attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
Install runner tracks at floors, ceiling and structural walls and
columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work.
Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere
as indicated to the structural support or substrate above the ceiling.
Space studs 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.
Door Frames: Install additional jamb studs at door frames as
in icateT Fut not less than 2 studs at each jamb. Space jack studs
over door frames at same spacing as partition studs.
Space wall furring members 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.
Nail or screw furring members to structural support where possible;
otherwise wire -tie or clip as recommended by manufacturer.
Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing
at opening and terminations in the work, and at locations required to
support fixtures, equipments, services, heavy trim, furnishings and
-- similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on gypsum
board alone.
GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
Pre -Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the
installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing
of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has
been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings,
supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been
completed.
Install sound attenuation blankets as indicated, prior to gypsum board
unless readily installed after board has been installed.
General Standards: In addition to compliance with GA-216, comply with
manu ac urer s instructions and requirements for fire -resistance
ratings (if any), whichever is most stringent.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-4
Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end -butt joints
wherever possible.
Form control joints (CtrJt) and expansion joints (ExpJt) with space
between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
Cover both faces of steel studs with gypsum board in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls, which are properly
braced internally.
Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire,
air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of
not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be limited to not less than
75% of full coverage.
Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J-type semi -
finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not
fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.
Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by
manufacturer, instaTT gypsum board with "floating" internal corner
construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated
or unless control or expansion joints are indicated.
Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with GA-216 and
manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
SPECIAL GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATIONS:
Single -Layer Walls and Partitions: Install exposed gypsum board.
Fasten with screws, or with nails where permitted.
Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile
and simi ar rigid applied wall finishes, install gypsum backing
board.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:
General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim
accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports.
Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work.
Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise
be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated.
Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where
semi -finishing type is indicated. Install L-type trim where work is
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-5
tightly abutted to other work, and install. special kerf-type where
other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-
type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled
(including expansion joints).
Install J-type semi -finishing trim where indicated, and where
exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings.
Install metal control joint (beaded -type) where required.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL FINISHING:
General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions),
aTT nges of trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners heads, surface
defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.
Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of
compound recommended by manufacturer.
Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where a
trim accessory is indicated.
— Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including pref i l l of openings
in base), and sand between last 2 coats and after last coat.
Base for Ceramic Tile: Do not install drywall finishing where ceramic
tile and similar rigid applied finishes are indicated.
Partial Finishing: Omit third coat (if specified) and sanding on
concealed rywa work which is indicated for drywall finishing,
including sound, fire, air and smoke -rated work.
Refer to the 9T, 9V, and 9Y-Series sections for decorative; finishes to
be applied to drywall work.
PROTECTION OF WORK:
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection
of the gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during the
remainder of the construction period.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM DRYWALL 9DO-6
SECTION 9EO
ACOUSTICAL CEI IN S
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions
Supplementary Conditions (if any),
section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
of Contract, including General and
apply to work specified in this
Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling (AcClg) is shown on the
drawings and in schedules.
Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the
following:
Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Subcontract the installation of acoustical ceilings to an experienced
installation firm which is acceptable to the manufacturer of the
acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from the
manufacturer.
Standards for Terminology and Performance: Applicable publications by
the Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association (AIMA), including
"Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical Materials".
FM Compliance: Class I.
Fire Hazard Classification: UL tested, listed and labeled as "Class 0-
25 .
SI IRMT TTAI C
Manufacturer's Data, Acoustical Ceilings: For information only, submit
2 copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation
instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for
each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and
other data as required to show compliance with these specifications.
Distribute one additional copy of each installation instruction to the
Installer.
Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and
refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against
materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and
acoustical performances.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-1
Samples, Acoustical Ceilings: Submit 3 sets of 12" square samples for
each acoustical unit required. In each set of samples show the full
range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work.
Sample submittal and Architect's review will be for color and texture
.-. only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
Submit 3 12" long samples of each exposed runner and molding.
Architects' review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with
other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
Maintenance Stock, Acoustical Ceilings: At time of completing the
installation, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner.
Furnish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with
protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate
labels.
Acoustical Units: Furnish an amount equal to 1.0% of the amount
installed.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until
space has een enclosed and weather -tight, and until wet -work in space
has been completed and nominally dry, and until work above ceilings is
complete, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will
be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final
occupancy.
PRODUCTS
CEILING UNITS:
Acoustical Tile (AcTI):
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's
stamen -ard the units prepared for the mounting system indicated, and of
the type recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
Type I:
Vinyl Covered Gypsum Lay -In Panels: Provide units nom. 2 x 4, sharp -
cut square edges, thick, ire code "C" gypsum board core faced
w/factory-laminated 2-mil thick vinyl, stipple pattern embossed white
color.
Mfr: New suspended ceiling tile shall match existing PAWS
suspended ceiling system. USG or equal.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
0-
9EO-2
Type I I :
Mineral Fiber Acoustical Panels: Provide units not less than 5/8"
thick and of density not less than 10 lbs. per cu. ft., medium -coarse
non -directional texture, NRC 0.50 to 0.60, STC 30-34, light reflectance
over 75%. White Color.
Product: Provide one of the following approved equal.
Minabord Cortega, by Armstrong Cork Co.
Natural Fissured II, US Gypsum Co.
CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS:
General: Comply with ASTM C 635, as applicable to the type of
suspension system required for the type of ceiling unit indicated.
Coordinate with other work supported by others penetrating through the
ceilings including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition system
(if any).
Structural Class: Match existing system.
Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM
Table 1, Direct Hung.
Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A 641, soft temper,
prestretc ed, yield -stress load of at least 3 times design load,
but not less than 12 gage (0.106").
Type of System: Direct -hung suspension system.
System Manufacturer: Donn DXLA Alum. capped grid ;system as mfrd by
USG or equal.
Edge Moldings: Manufacturer's standard channel molding for edges and
penetrations of ceiling, with a single flange of molding exposed, white
baked enamel finish unless otherwise indicated.
Exposed Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard exposed runners,
cross -runners, and accessories, of the types and profiles indicated,
with exposed cross runners coped to lay flush with main runners.
Finish of Exposed Members: Provide uniform factory -applied finish
on exposed surfaces oT ceiling suspension system including
moldings, trim and accessories.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, white
unless otherwise selected by Architect.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Edge Trim Moldings: Metal of types and profiles to match existing,
white finis unless otherwise indicated.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-3
Acoustical Sealant: A heavy -bodied, non -shrinking, non-drying, non -sag
grade mastic compound intended for interior sealing of concealed
construction joints.
•— Concrete Inserts: Type recommended by suspension system manufacturer,
sized for pull-out resistance of not less than 5-times the hanger
design load for structural classification indicated (ASTM C 635, Table
^, 1, Direct Hung). For wire -type inserts, provide units of not less than
8-gage galvanized wire construction.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION WORK:
Concrete Inserts: Deliver inserts to carpentry trade well in advance
of time fo__rm_w_o_rT is completed. Furnish layouts for insert locations
and spacings. Refer to 3A-Series sections for installation.
Installer must examine the conditions under which the acoustical
ceiling work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until
^" unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use
of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected
ceiling plans wherever possible.
INSTALLATION:
General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fire -resistance
rating requirements as indicated, and industry standards applicable to
^, the work.
Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if
any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.
Install tile with pattern running in one direction.
Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers
supported only from building structural members as indicated. Locate
hangers near each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or
direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -typing, either directly to
structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are
secure and appropriate for the substrate, and which will not
deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-4
Install edge moldings of the type indicated at edges of each acoustical
ceiling area, and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be
exposed after completion of work.
Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant,
concealed —on back of vertical leg before fastening to vertical
surface.
Secure moldings to building construction by fastening with screw -
anchors into the substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg.
Space holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than 16"
o.c. along each molding.
Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level
tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0".
Miter corners of moldings accurately to provide hair -line joints,
securely connected to prevent dislocation.
Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, so that
flange faces will be flush (cope flange of member supported by other
member). -
Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system. Place
splines or flanges of suspension system into kerfed edges, or insert
tile tongues into tile grooves, so that every tile -to -tile joint is
closed by a double lap of material.
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints
parallel to room axis in both directions, unless otherwise shown.
Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut
for accurate fit at borders and around work which penetrates
ceiling.
Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf -type spring steel
spacers between tile and molding, spaced at 12" centers.
Fabricate access units (which have not been factory -fabricated)
from special suspension system access members and same acoustic
tile units used in remainder of ceiling. Modify edges of tile as
required to allow for removal of access units.
Scribe and cut tile to fit accurately at edges of ceiling and
around penetrations in the ceiling.
Install edge trim moldings where indicated, and elsewhere as needed to
conceal edges of acoustical units which would otherwise be exposed to
view after completion of the work. Anchor with fasteners or, if not
possible, secure in place with permanent adhesive.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-5
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge
moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's
instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove
and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
-� permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
The Installer shall advise the Contractor of required protection for
the acoustical ceilings, including temperature and humidity limitations
and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and
deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 9EO-6
SECTION 9GO
TILE WORK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of tile work is shown on drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturing Standards: Furnish tile conforming with Standard Grade
requirements of TCA 137.1.
When using setting and grouting materials manufactured under TCA
license, include identification together with formula on each
container.
Provide materials obtained from only one source for each type and color
of tile.
Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary
setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's
i nstructi ons.
1%I IRMT TTAI C
Manufacturer's Data; Tile Work:
For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical
information and installation instructions for all materials required,
except bulk materials. Include certifications and other data as may be
required to show compliance with these specifications. Transmit a copy
of each instruction to the Installer.
Samples; Tile Work: Submit 3 samples of each type and color of tile
required, not less than 12" square on plywood or hardboard backing, and
grouted. Also, submit one full-size sample of each tile accessory.
Submit samples of trim and other units if requested by Architect.
Review will be for color, pattern, and texture only. Compliance with
all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
TILE WORK 9GO-1
Deliver packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's
i nstructi ons.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Glazed Wall Tile: Size, color pattern as shown; cushion edge units,
except w ere square edge units are indicated.
Finish: Bright glaze (BG), where indicated.
Trim Shapes: As required for complete installation, of same material,
size, color, and finish of field tile.
Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Latex -modified portland cement thin -set
mortar complying with ANSI 118.4.
Commercial Cement Grout: Proprietary compound of portland cement and
additives, factory -blended to decrease shrinkage and increase moisture
-- resistance.
Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the requirements
for modified portland cement grout include the following:
Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout; Upco Chem./USM Corp.
L&M Acid-R Grout; L&M-Surco Mfg. Inc.
EXECUTION
T NWFCTT ON
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which tile work
is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
General: Comply with ANSI standard installation specifications A108.1
1li_rou__gF A108.7 except as otherwise indicated. Maintain minimum
temperature limits and installation practices as recommended by
proprietary mortar and grout materials manufacturer.
Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to
form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise
shown, Termi nate work neatly at obstructions., edges and corners
without disruption of pattern or joint alignments..
TILE WORK 9GO-2
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for mixing and installation
of proprietary materials.
Neutralize and seal substrates in accordance with mortar or adhesive
manufacturer's instructions.
Setting Beds: Provide setting beds as shown. If not shown, provide
one of the following, subject to the specified limitations.
Use portland cement mortar setting beds for walls and floors on
substrates where thickness permits.
Use organic adhesive setting bed only on clean, smooth, flat
plaster walls and gypsum wall board.
Jointing Pattern:
Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are the same size.
Layout tile work and center tile fields both directions in each space
or on'each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide
uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
Placement: Comply with applicable_ requirements of the specified
standards for installation.
Portland cement mortar set glazed wall tile: ANSI A108.1.
Dry -Set portland cement mortar wall and floor tile: ANSI A108.5.
Grout:
Use commercial cement grout for grouting tile wall joints, unless
otherwise shown.
Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic
tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of
cracked, c ipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
Protection: When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply a
protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls
and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other
heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage and
wear.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral
cleaner from all tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TILE WORK 9GO-3
SECTION 9N0
RESILIENT FLOORING
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on the
-- drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Wherever possible, provide resilient flooring and accessories produced
by a single manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data; Resilient Flooring:
For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data
and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and
accessory. Transmit a copy of each installation instruction to the
Installer.
Samples; Resilient Flooring:
Submit 3 sets of samples of each type, color and finish of resilient
flooring and accessory required. Provide full-size tile units and 12"
square samples of sheet flooring and 6" long sample of accessory.
Include full range of flooring color and pattern variation. Sample
submittals will be reviewed for color texture and pattern only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor.
Maintenance Instructions; Resilient Flooring:
Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended
maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and
accessories.
Replacement Material; Resilient Floors: After completion of work,
deliver rep acement materials tote project site, as follows:
Tile flooring, not less than one box for each 50 boxes, or
fraction thereof, for each type, size, and color installed.
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-1
Furnish replacement materials from the same manufactured lot as the
materials installed.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Continuously heat areas to receive flooring to 70 degrees F. for at
least 48 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such
that heating is required. Maintain 70 degrees F. temperature
continuously during and after installation as recommended by flooring
manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours.
PRODUCTS
COLORS AND PATTERNS:
Provide colors and patterns as selected by Architect from mfr's
standards.
TILE FLOORING:
Vinyl Tile (VnT): FS SS-T-312, Type III, 12" X 12" X 1/8" gage, unless
otherwise indicated. -
ACCESSORIES:
Resilient Base (RsBs): Provide base complying with FS SS-W-40, either
Type I rubber or Type II vinyl, with matching end stops and preformed
or molded corner units, as follows:
Height: 4".
Thickness: 1/8" gage.
Style: Standard top -set cove.
Resilient Edge Strips (RsEdStp): 1/8" thick, homogenous vinyl of
rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring,
or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less
than 1" wide.
Adhesives (Cements): As recommended by flooring manuffacturer to suit
material and substrate conditions.
Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring
manufcturer.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resilient
flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-2
in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
PREPARATION:
Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered
and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates
acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed
work.
Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for
filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors.
Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that
concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and ready to receive
flooring.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring
manufacturer prior to application of adhesive. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's directions.
INSTALLATION:
General:
Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture
content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative
humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Where movable partitions are shown, install sheet flooring before
partitions are erected.
Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces,
thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe around obstructions and to
produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring
into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking.device.
Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and
other such items as occur within finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of
flooring installed in these covers. Tightly cement. edges to perimeter
of floor around covers and to covers.
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-3
Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising
and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or
other surface imperfections.
Tile Flnnrq:
Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the room
are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths
less than 1/2 the at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis,
unless otherwise shown.
Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same
sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around
all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not
acceptable.
Lay tile in "Checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in
alternate tile.
Accessories:
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other
permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install
base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed corner units, or
fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners.
Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with
continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with
adhesive. Install edging strips at all unprotected edges of flooring,
unless otherwise shown.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral
type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect
installed flooring from damage by covering.
Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final
inspection of work, thoroughly clean floor and accessories.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING 9NO-4
SECTION 9TO
PAINTING
^" GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as
herein specified.
The work included painting and finishing of interior and exterior
exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise
indicated.
`-" Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in
addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under
other sections of the work.
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including
primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other
applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in
"schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is
specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or
surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as
adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not
�-, designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors
available for the materials systems specified.
PAINTING NOT INCLUDED:
The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -
applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these
specifications.
Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous
metal items is included under the various sections for structural
steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items.
Also, shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
equipment or accessories.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: The painting of mechanical and
electrical work is specified in Division 15 & 16, respectively.
PAINTING 9TO-1
Pre -finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include
painting when factory -finishing or installer finishing is specified for
such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefi nished
partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and
casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light
fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance
frames, doors and equipment.
Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not
required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and
generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility
tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
stainless steel, c romium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished
materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units,
mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators,
linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not_
require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not . paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data: Submit mfr's technical information including
paint label analysis and application instructions for each material
proposed for use.
Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture
only. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat
of each finish sample.
On concrete masonry, provide two 4" square samples of masonry for
each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish
coat.
On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building
components, duplicate painted finishes of the prepared samples.
On at least 100 sq. ft. of surface as directed, provide full -coat
finish samples until required sheen, color and texture is
obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -
place work.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened
packages and containers bearing mfr's name and label, and the following
information.
PAINTING 9TO-2
Name or title of material.
Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
Mfr's stock number and date of mfr.
Mfr's name.
�-- Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle.
Constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
JOB CONDITIONS: Apply water -base paints only when the temperature of
surfaces to a painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between
50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint
mfr's printed instructions.
Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees
F. and 95 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint mfr's
printed instructions.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative
humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise
permitted by the paint mfr's printed instructions.
Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas
and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the
temperature limits specified by the paint mfr. during application and
drying periods.
PRODUCTS:
COLORS AND FINISHES: All exterior and interior walls (up to ceiling
height) shall be painted to match existing color unless noted
otherwise. No texture will be required at CMU surfaces to be painted.
Prime surfaces as spec.
Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish color chips for
surfaces to be painted.
Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the
job.
Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the
su strates and service indicated.
Lead content in the pigment, if any, is limited to contain not
more than 0.5% lead, as lead metal based on the total non-volatile
(dry -film) of the paint by weight.
PAINTING
9TO-3
This limitation is extended to all interior surfaces and those
exterior surfaces, such as stairs, decks, porches, railings,
windows, and doors which are readily accessible to children under
seven years of age.
Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with
prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in
which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total
coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other
trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials
proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide
barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as
required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems
using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
MATERIAL QUALITY:
Provide best quality grade of the various types of coatings as
regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials mfr's. Materials
not displaying the mfr's identification as a standard, best -grade_
product will not be acceptable.
Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not
intended to imply that products of the named mfrs. are required to
the exclusion of equivalent products of other mfrs.
Federal Specifications establish the minimum acceptable quality
for paint materials. Provide a written certification from the
paint mfr. that materials provided meet or exceed these minimums.
Mfr's products which comply with the coating qualitative
requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in
quantitative requirements, may be considered for use only when
acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and mfr's
certificate of performance to the Architect for any proposed
substitutions.
Provide undercoat paint produced by the same mfr. as the finish coats.
Use only thinners approved by the paint mfr., and use only within
recommended limits.
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:
Provide following paint systems for the various substrates, as
indicated.
Exterior Concrete Masonry Units:
EPS-1: 1st
Coat
- Surface
filler (TT-F-1098).
2nd
Coat
- Acrylic
emulsion (TT-P-19).
3rd
Coat
- Acrylic
emulsion (TT-P-19).
PAINTING 9TO-4
Ferrous Metal:
EPS-15: 1st Coat - Red lead pigmented primer (TT-P-86, Type
III).
2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel (TT-E-489, Class A).
3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel (TT-E-489, Class A .
First coat not required on items delivered shop primed.
Aluminum: Paint not required.
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:
Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as
indicated.
Concrete:
IPS-4: 1st Coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29).
2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy (TT-C-545).
3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy (TT-C-545).
.�, Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness, clear finish.
Concrete Masonry Units:
IPS-7: 1st Coat - Surface filler (TT-F-1098).
2nd Coat - Polyester, epoxy (TT-C-545).
3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy (TT-C-545).
Apply fill coat at a rate to ensure complete coverate
with all pores filled. Not less than 4.0 mils dry film
thickness, excluding first coat.
Gypsum Drywall Systems:
IPS-10: 1st Coat - Latex primer (TT-P-650).
-- 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29).
Painted Woodwork and Hardboard:
IPS-25: 1st Coat - Enamel undercoat (TT-E-543).
2nd Coat - Semi -gloss enamel (171-E-509).
3rd Coat - Semi -gloss enamel (TT-E-509).
Stained Woodwork:
IPS-27: 1st Coat - Interor Oil stain (TT-S-711).
2nd Cost - Bleached shellac (TT-S-30.0).
3rd Coat - Rubbing varnish (TT-V-86 .
4th Coat - Rubbing varnish (TT-V-86 .
PAINTING 9TO-5
Fill open grained wood with filler complying with TT-F-
336 and wipe before first varnish coat.
H FCUTION:
TNSPFCTTON-
Applicator must examine the area and conditions under which painting
work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable.to the Applicator.
Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a
durable paint film.
SURFACE PREPARATIONS:
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict
accordance with the paint mfr's instructions and as herein specified,
for each particular substrate conditions.
Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates,
lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -
painted, or provide surface -applies protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for the
complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed
items by workmen skilled in the trades involved.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface
treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning.
Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete,
concrete block, cement plaster and cement -asbestos board to be painted
by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by
roughening as required to remove glaze.
Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be
painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to
be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish
paint, correct this conditions before application of paint. Do not
paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted
in the mfr's printed directions.
Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial
solution of muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner, flush floor with
clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.
PAINTING 9TO-6
Ferrous metals: Clean ferrous surfaces.: which are not galvanized or
shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign
substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where
required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and
touch-up with the same type shop primer.
MATERIALS PREPARATION:
Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with mfr's directions.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density, and stir as required during the application of the materials.
"- Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if
necessary, strain the material before using.
APPLICATION:
General: Apply paint in accordance with the mfr's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of
material being applied.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show
through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform
finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that
all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
® Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently -fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation
of equipment.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or
grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.
Paint the back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers
to match the exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the
exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -
primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
PAINTING 9TO-7
Scheduling Painting: Apply the first -coat material to surfaces that
have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as
soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper
drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm,
does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the
application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not less than the
m r s recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film
thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating
mfr.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical
work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms
and in occupied spaces.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
Heat exchanges.
Tanks.
Ductwork, insulation.
Motor, mechanical equip., and supports.
Accessory items.
Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to the
following:
Conduit and fittings.
Switchgear.
Prime Coats: Apply a prime coat of material which is required to be
painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no
burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine
texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in
texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque,
smooth sur ace of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness
or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
PAINTING 9TO-8
Transparent (Clear) finishes: Use multi.ple coats to produce glass -
smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps,
cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail
holes, or other surface imperfections.
Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and
coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with
specified requirements.
CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:
Clean-up: During the progress of the work, remove from the site of all
discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each
work day.
Upon completion of painting work clean window glass and other paint -
spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of
washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage
finished surfaces.
Protection: protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or
not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
the Architect.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted
finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for
protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
-- At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING 9TO-9
SECTION 1OA1
METAL TOILET PARTITI
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply
to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of metal toilet partitions is indicated on drawings.
Types of metal toilet partitions required include the following:
Floor -supported (no headrail) partitions.
Wall -hung screens.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting
or work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances
wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay
work.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be
built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related
work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
Mfrs offering products to comply with the requirements for metal toilet
partitions include the following:
Global Steel Products Corp.; Knickerbocker Partition Corp.; Metpar
Steel Products Corp.; Mills Metal Compartment Co.; Sanymetal
Products Co.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's detailed
technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including
catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of
toilet par i ion assemblies not fully described by product drawings,
templates, and instructions of installation of anchorage devices built
into other work.
METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 1OA1-1
PRODUCTS
MATPPTAI C-
�- General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface
a1 tness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-
bonderized, of the following minimum thicknesses:
Pilasters (Unbraced): 0.0598" (16 gage).
Panels and Screens: 0.0359" (20 gage).
Doors: 0.0299" (22 gage).
Concealed Reinforcement for Anchorages: 0.1046" (12 gage).
Concealed Reinforcement for Tapping: 0.0747" (14 gage).
Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Core: Mfr's standard sound -
deadening, double-faced honeycomb, impregnaged Kraft paper.
—� Pilaster Shoes:. ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less
than 3 high, not less than 0.0319" (20 gage), finished to match
hardware.
Stirrup Brackets: Mfr's standard design for attaching panels to walls
and pi asters, c romium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy to match hardware
finish.
Hardware and Accessories: Mfr's standard design, heavy-duty operating
hardware and accessories of non-ferrous cast alloy with polished chrome
,., finish.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Mfr's standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel, or brass finished to match hardware, with theft -
resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip
galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated
steel.
FABRICATION:
General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters
a�ri sated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure laminate face sheets to core material and seal edges with a
continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld
edges and corners, with exposed welds ground smooth.
-- Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement
to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as
indicated.
METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 1OA1-2
Panel and Door Dimensions: Not less than 1" thick units, unless
otherwise indicated.
Furnish 24" wide doors, unless otherwise indicated.
Furnish 32" wide (clear opening), swing out doors at stalls for
use by the handicapped, unless otherwise indicated. .
Furnish complete with anchorages and supporting framework for
installation in other work.
Floor -Supported Pilasters: Not less than 1 1/4" thick units, with
galvanized steel anc orage devices for securing to the floor.
Furnish anchorage devices complete with threaded rods, lock washers,
and leveling adjustment nuts. Furnish shoes at each pilaster.
Wall -Hung Screens: Not less than 1"thick panel units, size as
indicated, of same construction and finish as doors and panels.
Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system as
0 ows:
Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any
angle up to 90 degrees; either gravity type, spring -action cam
type, or concealed torsion rod type, to suit mfr's standards.
Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, with combination rubber -
aced door strike and keeper, designed for eacy emergency access.
Coat Hook: Mfr's standard unit, combination hook and bumper.
Door Pull: Mfr's standard unit.
Baked Enamel Finish: After fabrication and before applying enamel
coating system, clean the galvanized steel surfaces to remove
processing compounds, oils and other contaminants.
Prime the metal with a baked -on rust -inhibiting primer.
Apply two finish coats of thermosetting enamel, applied by the
electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with the paint
mfr's instructions.
Color: One of the mfr's standard colors, as indicated or, if not
in 1cated, as selected by the Architect.
EXECUTION
METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 1OAl-3
INSPECTION: Installer must examine the areas and conditions under
which to et partitions and related items are to be installed and
ontifythe Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the installer.
INSTALLATION:
General: Comply with mfr's recommended procedures and installation
sequence. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level.
Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels,
and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls
with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of
panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in
masonry or tile joints. Secure panels in position with mfr's
recommended anchoring devices as shown on final shop drawings or in
mfr's instructions.
Floor Supported Partitions: Secure pilasters to the supporting floor
system with the specified anchorage device. Level, plumb and tighten
�- the installation with the leveling device. Adjust tops of doors level
with the tops of pilasters when the doors are in the closed position.
Set pilaster units with anchorages having not less than 2" penetration
into the supporting floor system,- unless otherwise recommended by
partition mfr.
Hardware Adjustments: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper
-- operation after instal ation.
Set hinges on in -swing doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees
from the closed position when unlatched.
Set hinges on out -swing doors and entrance swing doors, if any, to
return to the fully closed position.
Wall Mounted Screens: Attach with heavy duty concealed anchoring
devices, as recommended by the fmr. to suit the supporting wall
-� construction. Set units in accordance with the mfr's instructions to
provide support for the units and to resist lateral impact.
r. Protection, Cleaning and Final Adjustments: Protect units so that
there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance.
Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware,
and other operating parts of the partition assembly just prior to final
inspection. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings
and accessories, and touch up minor scratches and other finish
�-- imperfections using materials and methods recommended by the partition
mfr. Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily field
repaired, as directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 1OA1-4
A—
SECTION 1OB1
TOILET ACCESSORIES
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements (Division 1) apply to the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on the
drawings.
The type of toilet accessories required include the following:
Paper towel dispensers
Toilet tissue dispensers
Waste receptacles
Sanitary napkin dispensers
Sanitary napkin disposal units
Soap dispensers
Grab bars
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
must be set in concrete or built into masonry for the installation
accessories. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
Products: Provide products of the same mfr. for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed in the same areas, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect.
Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be
permitted, except where otherwise indicated.
Provide locks, with the same keying for each type of accessory units in
the project wherever possible. Furnish two keys for each lock.
Mfr's offering products to comply with the requirements for toilet
accessories include the following:
Accessory Specialties, Inc.
American Dispenser Co., Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equip., Inc.
Bradley Corp.
G.M. Ketcham Co., Inc.
Moore Dispensers, Inc.
The Charles Parker Co.
Ponoco Metal Prod. Co.
Watrus Inc.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OBl-1
P_
SUBMITTALS:
Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's technical
aatta and n� stallation instructions for each toilet accessory. Transmit
copies of installation instructions to the Installer.
Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instruction and
erections for installation of anchorage devices in other work.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Proprietary references used herein are to serve as guide lines for
establishing style, type and quality of accessories to comply with
requirements of this project. Other accessories will a considered
provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal in weight,
finish, size, appearance and dispense same type of goods or services.
Paper Towel Dispenser and Waster Receptacle at Toilets: American
Dispenser Co.'s #164FS, stainless steel, surface mount, for single fold
�- towels, equip with latch. Provide at each toilet.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser: American Dispenser Co.'s No. 31MG "Likwidurn"
stainless steel globe. Provide one at each toilet lavatory. Off -set
mount and the dispensers in order that soap will not drip on sink
hardware but will drip on sink.
Grab Bars: Grab bars shall be 18 gage type 304 satin finished
stainless�steel with concealed mounting flanges and safety grip finish
and in 42" in length. The grab bars shall be 1 1/2" in outer diameter
and there shall be 1 1/2" clearance between the bars and the wall.
Fasten securely at each end. All grab bars shall be mounted 34" from
the finished floor to the top of the bar and parallel with the floor.
Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: American Dispenser Co.'s Model 651, surface
mounted, coin operated, stainless steel. At each women's toilet.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal Receptacle: At each women's toilet provide
disposal receptacle as follows:
Multiple Water Closets: American Dispenser Co.'s #47, partition
mounted double receptacle, through partition to serve two adjacent
waterclosets, stainless steel.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine the areas and conditions -under which toilet
accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10Bl-2
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach
accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or
directed.
Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same
material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel, as recommended by
mfr.
Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the
accessories.
Provide theft -resistant fasteners for all accessory mountings.
Secure toilet room accessories in accordance with the mfr's
instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES 1OB1-3
Q@
SECTION IOB3
METTL FRAMED MIRRORS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any), apply to
the work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of metal framed mirrors is shown on the drawings.
The type of metal framed mirrors required include the following:
Stainless steel framed mirrors.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
-- Mirror Glass
Toilet Accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
General: Provide metal framed mirror units produced by a single mfr.
for the entire project.
Mfrs offering products to comply with the requirements for stainless
steel framed mirrors include the following:
Accessory Specialties Co.
American Dispenser Co.
Bobrick Washroom Equip. Inc.
Bradley Corp.
Charles Parker Co.
G.M. Ketcham Mfg. Co.
-^ Pocono Metal Products Co.
Watrous, Inc.
CI II7 SAT TTAI C.
Mfr's Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of mfr's technical
data, detail drawings, and installation instructions for metal framed
mirrors. Transmit copy of instructions to the Installer.
Mfr's Warranty: Submit 2 copies of mfr's 5-year warranty against
silver spoilage of mirrors.
PRODUCTS
METAL FRAMED MIRRORS 1OB3-1
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, conforming to
FS ,— with silvering, copper coating;, and protective organic
coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
Backing: Resilient, non -absorbent filler material,with not less than
22 ga. ga.v. steel backing plate, one-piece construction, full height
and width of mirror frame. Corrugated cardboard or other moisture -
absorbent filler material is not acceptable.
Construct metal backing with hanger slots for concealed "tamper-
proof" mounting. Provide mfr's standard hanger to engage with
backing for concealed installation.
Stainless Steel Frames: AISI Type 302/304 with polished No. 4 finish
as follows:
Use channel shapes for frames, not less than 22 ga. (0.031")
stainless steel, with square corners either welded and ground
smooth or mitered and mechanically interlocked.
EXECUTION:
INSPECTION: Installer must examine the substrate and conditions under
which the wall mirror units are to be installed and notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the wok until
satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
the Installer.
INSTALLATION: Secure mirrors to walls in concealed "tamper -proof"
manner with special hangers, toggle bolts or screws. Set units
straight and square at locations and mountings indicated, in accordance
with the mfr's instructions for the type of substrate involved.
END OF SECTION
METAL FRAMED MIRRORS IOB3-2
SECTION 13M1
PRE-ENGINEERE B I
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions (if any), apply to work specified in this
section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of pre-engineered buildings work is shown on the
r- drawings.
The type is rigid frame metal roof and framing of nominal width,
length, wall height and roof pitch indicated. Manufacturer's
standard components may be used, providing components, and
accessories conform to architectural design appearance shown and
to specified requirements.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
�• Concrete Floor and Foundations: Division 3.
Installation of Anchor Bolts: Division 3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Design Criteria:
For structural steel members, comply with AISC "Specifications for
the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings".
For light gage steel members, comply with AISI "Specification for
the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members".
Design primary and secondary members and covering for applicable
loads and combination of loads in accordance with MBMA
"Recommended Design Practices Manual".
For welded connections, comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code".
Design Loads:
Design each member to withstand the stresses resulting from
combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable
percentage of actual to allowable stress in that member, as
prescribed in MBMA's "Recommended Design Practices.Manual".
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M1-1
Fabrication Criteria:
Provide pref abricated metal buildings as produced by a
manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the fabrication and
erection of pre-engineered metal structures of the type and
quality indicated.
Design sizes of prefabricated components and necessary field
connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and
disassembly. Fabricate components in such manner that once
assembled they may be disassembled, repackaged and reassembled
with a minimum amount of labor and maximum salvageability.
Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to
correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams,
and instruction manuals.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data; Pre -Engineered Buildings:
Submit manufacturer's product information, specifications and
installation instructions for building components and acessories.
Shop Drawings; Pre -Engineered Buildings:
Submit complete erection drawings showing anchor bolts settings,
roof framing, transverse cross sections, covering and trim
details, and accessory installation details to clearly indicate
the proper assembly of building components.
Certification; Pre -Engineered Buildings:
Submit written Certification prepared and signed by a Professional
Engineer, registered to practice in the State where building is to
be erected, verifying that the building design meets indicated
loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.
Samples; Pre -Engineered Buildings:
Submit samples of the following. Architect's review will be for
color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the responsibility of the Contractor.
12" long by actual width of roofing panels, with required
finishes.
Fasteners for application of roofing and siding panels.
Sealants and closures.
Maintenance Stock; Pre -Engineered Buildings:
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M1-2
Furnish at least 5% excess over; the >required amount of nuts,
bolts, screws, washers, and other required fasteners for each
building. Pack in cartons and store on the site where directed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver and store prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and
other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins
or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal
panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not
store panels in contact with other materials which might cause
staining.
-- PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Hot -Rolled Structural Shapes: ASTM A 36 or A 529.
Tubing or Pipe: ASTM A 500, Grade B; ASTM A 501 or
Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: 42,000 psi minimum
yield strength; 9, A 570, or A 57 .
Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: ASTM A 607, Grade 50.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 with G 90 coating; "Class"
to suit building manufacturer's standards.
STRUCTURAL FRAMING COMPONENTS:
Rigid Frames: Hot -rolled structural steel. Factory welded and
shop painted built-up "I" shape or open web rigid frame consisting
of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish
complete with attachment plates, bearing plates and splice
members. Factory drill frames for bolted field assembly.
Wind Bracing: Adjustable, threaded steel rods, 1/2" diameter
minimum; ASTM A 36 or A 572, Grade D.
Secondary Framing: Purlins, eave struts, end wall beams, flange
and sag racing; minimum 16 ga. rolled formed sections. Shop
painted.
Bolts: ASTM A 307 or A 325 as necessary for design loads and
connection details. Shop painted bolts, except provide zinc -or
�^ cadmium -plated units when in direct contact with panels.
Fabrication: Shop fabricate to the indicated size and section
complete with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M1-3
required for erection, welded in place, and with all required
holes for anchoring or connections shop drilled or punched to
template dimensions.
Shop Connections power riveted, bolted, or welded
Field Connections bolted.
Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale,
rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond.
Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7
for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning.
Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with
the manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer having over 50%
rust-ingibitive pigment, such as red -lead mixed pigment alkyd
varnish (FS TT-P-86, Type II) or zinc chromate iron -oxide alkyd
(TT-P-063).
Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with
zinc dust -zinc oxide primer, FS TT-P-641.
ROOFING:
General: Provide roofing sheets formed to the general profile or
configuration as indicated. Provide flshings, closers, fillers,
metal expansion joints, and other sheet metal accessories, factory
formed of same material and finish as roofing.
Zinc -Coated Steel Sheets (ZC-StSht): ASTM A 446, Grade C, with G
90 coating complying with ASTM A 525.
Metal thickness not less than 26 ga. (0.0179").
Sheet Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard system of self
tapping screws, bolts, and nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking
bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to
withstand design loads.
Provide metal -backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners
bearing on weather side of panels.
Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application
and galvanized or cadmium plated fasteners for interior
applications.
Locate and space fastenings for true vertical and horizontal
alignment. Use proper type fastening tools to obtain controlled
uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene
washer.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M1-4
Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing sheets by
means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
Flexible Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded cellular rubber,
se -ex inguis ing, cut or premolded to match corrugation
configuration of roofing sheets. Provide where indicated and
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Sealing Tape: 100% solids, pressure sensitive grey
po yiso uty ene compound tape with release paper backing. Not
less than 1/2" wide and 1/8" thick, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
and permanently elastic.
Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide or
silicon rubber sealant as recommended by the building
manufacturer.
Baked Enamel Finish: Provide shop -applied baked enamel finish to
galvanized steel roofing and related trim and accessories.
Clean galvanized steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with
r' a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid
rinse.
Apply to pretreated steel baked -on thermo-setting synthetic enamel
system, such as acrylic enamel or silicone polyester, in one or
more coats as standard with the manufacturer to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of one mil.
For roofing, apply finish coat on exterior facings and apply
manufacturer's standard wash coat on the reverse face.
Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES:
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide coated steel sheet
metal accessories with coated steel roofing.
THERMAL INSULATION:
Insulation: Protection glass fiber blanket insulation, not less
than 0.5 T6. per cubic foot density, thickness as indicated, with
UL flamespread classification of 25 or less, and 2" wide
continuous vapor tight edge tabs.
Vapor barrier, vinyl film.
Retainer Strips: Provide 26 ga. formed galvanized steel retainer
clips colored to match insulation facing.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M-5
Location: Locate insulation on underside of roof sheets,
extending across top flange of purlin members and held taut and
snug to roofing panels by retainer strips.
EXECUTION:
INSPECTION:
The Erector of pre-engineered metal buildings must examine the
foundations and the conditions under which work is to be performed
and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.
ERECTION:
Framing: Erect structural framing true to line, level and plumb,
rigid and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with
full bearing to supporting structures, set with double -nutted
anchor bolts. Use a non -shrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing
and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for
not less than 7 days after placement.
Purlins & Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight fitting
closure c aanels and fascias. Secure purlins and girts to
structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag
rods.
Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof as
indicated ated on the drawings.
Whee diaphrram strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to
resist wind forces, rod or other forms of bracing will not be
required.
ROOFING:
General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so that prevailing winds
blow over not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets
one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for
neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or
application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from
damage.
Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or
fluted roof sheets, and between roof sheeting and protrucing
equipment, vents, and accessories.
Apply sealant tape continuous to clean, dry suface of weather side
of fastenings on end laps and on sidelaps of corrugated or nesting
type, ribbed or fluted panels and elsewhere to make weatherproof
to driving rain.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M1-6
Thermal Insulation: Install insulation in accordance with mfr's
published directions and concurrently with installation of roof
panels. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths
with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier.
-- Install retainer strips at each longitudinal joint, straight and
taut nesting with roof rib to hold insulation in place.
Dissimilar Materials: Where aluminum surfaces come in contact
with errous metal or other incompatible materials, keep aluminum
surfaces from direct contact by applications to the other mateial
as follows:
One coat of zinc chromate primer, FS TT-P-645, followed by
two coats of aluminum paint, SSPC-Paint 101.
In lieu of 2 coats of aluminum paint, apply one coat of high -
build bituminous paint, SSPC-Paint 12, applied to a thickness
of 1/16" over zinc chromate primer.
Backpaint aluminum surface where impracticable to paint other
surface.
END OF SECTION
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS 13M-7
SECTION 15A
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1 The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1
of the specifications apply to the work specified in this Division
as well as Division lb.
1.2 All work covered by this Section of the Specifications shall be
accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the
Contract Documents and any addenda or directive which may be issued.
2. GENERAL:
2.1 The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, materials,
etc. and shall perform all operations in connection with the
installation of Mechanical and Electrical work in accordance with
these Contract Documents.
2.2 The Contractor shall execute all work specified or indicated on
accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment
necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and
systems, whether or not mentioned specifically mentioned.
2.2 Every contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting
into place in a satisfactory and neat workmanlike manner in every
particular to the approval of the Owner.
2.3 Confer with the General Contractor and other Contractors
regarding the location and size of pipes, equipment, fixtures,
conduit, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, etc., in order that
there be no interferences between the installation or progress of
the work of any Contractor on the project.
2.4 The Mechanical and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and
shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building
and the work of other trades will allow. All changes from Drawings
necessary to make the work of each Contractor conform to the
building construction and the work of other trades shall be done at
the appropriate Contractor's expense.
2.5 SHOULD ANY BIDDER CONSIDER THAT ANY REQUIREMENT OF THESE
SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS WILL MAKE THE EFFECTIVE OPERATION OF ANY
PORTION OR THE WHOLE INSTALLATION IMPOSSIBLE, OR IF HE FEEL A VITAL
COMPONENT HAS BEEN OMITTED; HE MUST DESCRIBE IN HIS BID CHANGES HE
DEEMS NECESSARY. FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS AN
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-1
AGREEMENT ON THE PART OF THE BIDDER TO GUARANTEE THE EFFECTIVE
OPERATION OF THE INSTALLATION.
2.6 All equipment shall be installed complete with all necessary
fittings, supports, accessories, etc., as necessary for a complete
installation, providing the desired function. All equipment shall be
installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure
unless specifically stated otherwise.
2.7 Nothing in these specifications or drawings shall be construed
as directing any contractor from deviating from any legally binding
code or ordinance.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 General: The Contractor is required to submit four copies of the
following general types of information:
Certi f i cat es .
Shop drawings/component data.
Maintenace manual.
Warrantees.
3.2 Certificates: The Contractor is required to submit to the
Engineer the following certificates:
3.2.1 Certificate of Approval: Contractor shall review all
required components for use in this application to ascertain that
all items will function as necessary and as designed. Contractor
shall include with his equipment submittal a certification that
this review has been accomplished. The required certificate is
included at the back of this section.
3.2.2 Certificate of Owner instruction: This certificate is
required prior to project closeout. This certificate shall be
signed by the Owner. See paragraphs 8 and 10 this section for
�^ additional information on this certificate. The required
certificate is included at the back of this section.
�. 3.3.3 Certificate of Receipt of Loose Items: This certificate is
required to ensure that Owner has received all required loose
items, This certificate shall be signed by the Owner. The
required certificate is included at the back of this section.
3.4 Shop Drawings/Component Data: Submittals shall follow the
following format:
3.4.1 Submittals shall be assembled in three -hole pressboard
cover (Smead No. Br129 or equal) with Acco fasteners and
compressors.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-2
3.4.2 Submittal booklet shall be labeled on the outside as
"Mechanical SUbmittal" or as "Electrical Submittal".
3.4.3 Provide tabbed dividers for each specification section for
which information is required. For example, provide dividers with
"15250% "15651", etc. tabs.
3.4.4 The first page in each divider shall be the Contractor's
Submittal Certificate.
3.5 Maintenance Manuals: Furnish for approval three complete
Maintenance Manuals for all materials and equipment. Manuals shall
follow the following format:
3.5.1 Each manual shall include:
Approved shop drawings.
Wiring diagrams.
Operating instructions.
Lubrication instructions.
Maintenance instructions.
Parts lists.
Test reports.
3.5.2 Manuals shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer's
office prior to the date of final inspection.
3.5.3 Each manual shall be 8 1/2" x 11" and bound in a 3 ring
binder. Provide tabbed dividers labeled with the above divis.ions.
3.6 Warranties: See Division 1 for information on warranties.
4. OPENINGS AND SLEEVES IN CONSTRUCTION:
4.1 Most openings required in wall, floor, roof, ceiling, etc,
construction for Mechanical and Electrical Work will be provided by
the General Contractor in accordance with information furnished by
the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. All sleeves, inserts,
forms etc., required for openings shall be furnished by the
Contractor requiring same. The Mechanical and Electrical
Contractors shall be responsible for their size, fabrication, and
location. Installation will be by General Contractor. Where new
work has been installed previous to such request, the General
Contractor will do the necessary cutting and patching at the expense
of the Mechanical and Electrical Contractor.
5. PROTECTING SITE:
5.1 Provide adequate barricades, construction signs, torches, red
lanterns, guards, etc., as required during the progress of the work.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-3
Observe all applicable regulations respecting safety provision,
barricades, etc.
5.2 Protect utilities, trees, shrubbery, fences, poles, sidewalks,
curbs and all other property and surface structures from damage.
Any items which are disturbed shall be restored by the Contractor at
his own expense.
5.3 Whenever work damages streets, lawns, sidewalks, parking areas,
curbs or other finished surfaces, replace such surfaces with
material to match existing surfaces as approved by proper
authorities, including reinforcing steel where required.
5.4 Whenever work damages existing grassed areas, contractor shall
install sod to match existing.
6. MECHANICAL -ELECTRICAL COORDINATION:
6.1 Unless otherwise specified the Electrical Contractor will
furnish and install all conduit, wiring, disconnects, starters, -
thermal overload heaters, holding coils, remote pushbutton stations,
Hand -Off -Auto and multi -speed switches, and pilot lights for all
electrically operated mechanical equipment, including final
connections leaving items ready for operation.
6.2 Where starters are an intergral part of the equipment the
Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring and make
all final connections to the line side of the starter or disconnect
device. All wiring beyond this point shall be by the mechanical
contractor furnishing the motor.
6.3 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control devices such
as thermostats, pressure sensors, humidistats, etc. associated with
the mechanical equipment, and shall install those items which due to
their method of operation must be connected or integrated into the
equipment. Items not attached to mechanical equipment, duct or
piping shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring
for mechanical control shall be provided and installed by the
Electrical Contractor, irregardless of who installed the device.
Control diagrams shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
6.4 Each contractor shall consult with the Electrical Contractor
before ordering or installing equipment, to coordinate the motor,
starter, holding coil, overload, interlocks, etc. and shall be
equally responsible to insure that the equipment installed is of
proper size and type.
6.5 After wiring is completed by the Electrical Contractor, each
Mechanical Contractor shall inspect the appropriate wiring before
-- motors are operated. If any discrepancies are discovered the
Mechanical Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. The Owner
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-4
shall arrange to have the changes made as required. After any
required changes are complete, the Mechanical Contractor who
furnished the motor shall assume complete responsibility for motor
protection during the warranty period including initial startup of
each motor.
7. CONCRETE WORK AND PADS:
7.1 All concreting, reinforcing, and form work necessary in
connection with the construction of pads and the concreting around
ducts or raceways shall be provided by the mechanical or electrical
contractor, as appropriate.
8. OWNER INSTRUCTION:
8.1 Each contractor shall instruct the Owner's representative in the
operation and maintenance of each system. Instruction periods shall
include as a minimum 2 visits of 8 hours per visit. These visits
shall be at the convenience of the Owner. Submit a letter signed by
the Owner certifying satisfactory completion of instructional L
activities.
9. FINAL INSPECTION:
9.1 Final inspection will be made only after the Contractor
certifies in writing that the work is 100% complete.
9.2 A representative from each Contractor and sub -Contractor shall
be present and shall be prepared to assist the Owner/Engineer in
performing the inspection. This shall include the operation of all
equipment items, the removal of inspection panels/doors(as
requested), etc.
9.3 An inspection report describing incomplete/or unacceptable work
will be prepared. This will be reviewed with the Contractor at the
project site.
9.4 After the incomplete or unacceptable work is 1007. corrected the
Contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner.
10. PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
10.1 The following requirements must be fully completed before the
final application for payment will be accepted or approved.
10.1.1 Final inspection performed and all corrections made.
10.1.2 Submittal of:
Maintenance manual.
Owner instruction certification letter.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-5
Equipment warrantees.
Written receipt for all loose items.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-6
CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL OF SUBMITTED ITEMS
I, authorized representative of
(company), has reviewed these
submittals and find them to Be acceptable for the application intended
and approve them for this project.
signed:
title:
date:
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-7
CERTIFICATE OF OWNER INSTRUCTION)
I, authorized representative of
(Owner), have received
hours of instruction concerning the
project.
signed: (Owner)
title: (Owner)
company: (Owner)
— signed: (Contractor) -
title: (Contractor)
company: (Contractor)
date:
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-8
CERTIFICATE OF RECEIPT OF LOOSE ITEMS
I, , authorized representative of
(Owner), have received all
required loose items associated with the
project.
signed: (Owner)
title: (Owner)
company: (Owner)
signed: (Contractor)
title: (Contractor)
company: (Contractor)
date•
END OF SECTION 15000
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL 15A-9
r
SECTION 15B
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Type of identification devices specified in this section include
the following: ---
Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker.
r
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size,
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit product specifications and installation
instructions for each identification material and device required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
4.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories
and types required for each application as referenced in other
.^ Division-15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for
application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single
selection for each product category.
5. Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker:
5.1.1 General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright
colored, continuous -printed plastic tape, intended for direct -
burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide
tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of
service of buried pipe.
6. LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
6.1 General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations
used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding
designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers,
lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper
identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and
equipment.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15B-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7. APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:
7.1 General Installation Requirements:
7.2 Underground Piping Identification:
7.2.1 General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior
underground piping systems, install continuous underground -type
plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to
8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried
in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install
single line marker. For tile fields and similar installations,
mark only edge pipe lines of field.
END OF SECTION 15055
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15B-2
Wma
SECTION 15C
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Components specified in this section include the following:
Piping Materials.
Pipe/Tube Fittings.
Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products.
Piping Specialities.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in
accordance with ANSI B31.5, paragraph 527.5 for shop and jobsite
brazing of piping work. _
2.2 NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport
potable water, provide pipe and fittings bearing approval label by
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe, tube,
and fitting.
3.2 Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping
work..
4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
4.1 Except for hub -and -spigot and similar units of pipe, provide
pi, factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube.
Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and handling as required
to prevent pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from
�- inside of pipe and tube.
4.2 Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from
weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and
enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
4.3 Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside
storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof
wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-1
5. PIPING MATERIALS:
5.1 General: Provide pipe material indicated for each service.
Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements
and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. Piping
components shall be as follows.
5.2 Black Steel Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120.
5.3 Copper Tube: ANSI/ASTM B 88; Type (wall thickness) as indicated
for each service; hard -drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated.
5.4 ACR Copper Tube: ANSI/ASTM B 280.
5.5 Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301; include coupling
assembly; CISPI 310.
5.6 Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A 74.
5.7 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ANSI/ASTM D 1785.
5.8 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe (PE): ANSI/ASTM D 2104.
5.9 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe: (PVC):
ANSI/ASTM D 2665.
6. PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS:
6.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated fittings of type indicated
for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching
pipe connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply
with governing regulations and industry standards for selections,
and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.
Fittings shall be as follows.
6.2 Steel Pipe:
6.2.1 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or
galvanized as indicated.
6.2.2 Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5; Butt welding(weld-neck);
Raised -face. Wrought steel butt -welding.
6.2.3 Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for
connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe
where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where
pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full
length (no close -nipples).
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-2
6.3 Copper Tube:
6.3.1 Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
6.3.2 Copper -Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended
by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
6.4 Cast -Iron Soil Pipe:
6.4.1 Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301; and
complying with governing regulations.
6.4.2 Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil
pipe units; complying with same standards (ANSI/ASTM A 74).
6.4.3 Compression Gaskets: CISPI Standard HSN.
6.5 Plastic Pipe:
6.6 PVC/CPVC Pipe Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D 2464 for Schedule 80
threaded fittings; ANSI/ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 socket -type;
ANSI/ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 socket type; ANSI/ASTM D 2564 for
solvent cement; ANSI/ASTM D 2665 for drain, waste, and vent.
6.6.1 PE Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2609 for insert fittings;
ANSI/ASTM D 3261 for Schedule 40 and 80. PVC Sewer Pipe Fittings:
Match Pvc sewer pipe; comply with same standard (ANSI/ASTM D
2729); ANSI/ASTM 2564 for solvent cement.
7. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
7.1 Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with
installation requirements.
7.1.1 Tim -Antimony Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.
7.1.2 Silver Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96.5TS.
7.2 Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with
installation requirements.
7.2.1 Comply with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for brazing materials.
7.3 Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-
iron flanges; raised -face for steel flanges, unless otherwise
indicated.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-3
7.4 Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric
annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at
each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe
ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.
7.5 Cast -Iron Pipe No -Hub Connections: Provide 300 series stainless
steel shield and stainless steel worm gear clamps as recommended by
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute for all no -hub joints.
8. PIPING SPECIALITIES:
8.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein
with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or
outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside
diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if
any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for
occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
8.2 Dielectric Unions: Provide standard products recommended by
manufacturer for use in service indicated which effectively isolate
ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent
galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
8.3 Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
8.3.1 Sheet -Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round
tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded
longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and
smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.
8.3.2 Plastic -Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe;
remove burrs.
8.4 Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in
foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls of the following
material:
8.4.1 Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type,
consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeves
connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber
sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight
seal and electrical insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
9. PIPE INSTALLATION:
9.1 Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized
industry practices which will achieve permanently -leakproof piping
systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-4
GZ
failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but
with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes
(where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping
accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.
9.2 Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically
and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever
possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column
lines. Locate runs as shown or described be diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest
route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for
servicing building and its equipment.
9.3 Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and
other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building; limit
clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
9.4 Where possible, locate insulated piping in finished and occupied_
spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures,.
in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not
encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
9.5 Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through
transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment
spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under
piping that must be run through electrical spaces.
10. PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:
10.1 Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
10.2 Threaded Pipe:
10.2.1 Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove butts
and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or
pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting
manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to
leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
10.3 Brazed Pipe:
10.3.1 Braze copper tube -and -fitting joints where indicated, in
accordance with ANSI B31.
10.4 Soldered Pipe:
10.4.1 Solder copper tube -and -fitting joints where indicated, in
accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-5
squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of
areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into
fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth
and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before
it hardens.
10.5 Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints:
10.5.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and with applicable industry standards:
10.5.1.1 Solvent -Cemented Joints: ANSI/ASTM D 2235, and
ANSI/ASTM F 402.
11. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
11.1 Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe
penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where
penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure
escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration
hole,.and is flush with adjoining surface.
11.2 Dielectric Unions: Install at.each piping joint between
ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
11.3 Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping
passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs. Do not install
sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on
drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer.
11.3.1 Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size
sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free
movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion;
but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where
insulation includes vapor -barrier jacket, provide sleeve with
sufficient clearance for installation.
11.3.2 Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of
construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except
floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor
finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain.
11.3.3 Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of
concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary
closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering
sleeves.
11.3.4 Install sheet -metal sleeves at interior partitions and
ceilings other than suspended ceilings.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-6
11.3.5 Install plastic -pipe sleeves except as otherwise
indicated.
11.4 Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
11.4.1 Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links
around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each
bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts
until links have expanded to form watertight seal.
12. CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING:
12.1 General: Flush out piping systems with clean water before -
proceeding with required test. Inspect each run of each system for
completion of joints, supports and accessory items.
�- 13. PIPING TESTS:
13.1 All Piping Tests:
13.1.1 Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump
and gages.
13.1.2 Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever
feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test all
below -grade piping before backfill, NO EXCEPTIONS.
13.1.3 Test each natural section of each piping system
independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate
sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating.
13.1.4 Observe each test section for leakage at end of test
period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop
exceed 5% of test pressure, unless notes otherwise below.
13.2 Domestic -Water Piping Test:
13.2.1 Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated
pressure and time. Required test period is 2 hours. Test each
piping system at 1507. of operating pressure indicated, but not
less than 25 psi test pressure.
13.3 Sanitary Waste/Vent Piping Test:
13.3.1 Required test period is two hours. Test the waste and vent
piping system with a 15' head of water pressure. This shall be
accomplished by sealing all pipe openings and installing a
temporary section of piping which shall extend 15' above the
lowest portion of the piping system.
^- 13.4 Natural Gas Piping.Tests:
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-7
13.4.1 Required test period is 2 hours. Test gas, vacuum, and
pressure relief piping at 25 psi.
13.4.2 Natural Gas Piping System: No pressure drop is acceptable
unless it is the result of temperature differences between the
time the test was begun and the time the test ended.
13.5 Refrigerant Piping Leak Test:
13.5.1 Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant
piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping".
Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to
test all joints. Perform final test with 27" vacuum, and then
200 psi using halide torch. System must be entirely leak -free.
13.6 Miscellaneous Drainage Piping Leakage Test:
13.6.1 Seal pipe opening and fill pipe with water. Required test
period is 2 hours. Test fails if leakage is observed.
13.7 Repairs: Repair or replace piping by disassembly and
reinstallation, using new materials to the extent required to
eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.
Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other
temporary repair methods.
14. STERALIZE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:
14.1 After material -testing is complete, drain test water from.
piping and flush out piping to remove dirt and other contaminants.
Perform required disinfection and disinfection -testing.
15. Disinfection:
15.1.1 Disinfection shall be done using chlorine, gas or liquid.
Calcium or sodium hypochloride may be used.
15.1.2 A service cock with check valve shall be provided and
located at the point where new piping connects to existing,
downstream of the isolation valve. The disinfecting agent shall
be injected into and through the system from this cock only.
Provide a second discharge cock at the point where new piping
connects to existing, just upstream of isolation valve.
15.1.3 The disinfecting agent shall be injected by a
proportioning device through the service cock slowly and
continuously at an even rate. During disinfection, flow of
disinfecting agent into main connected tp public water supply is
not permitted.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-8
15.1.4 Open release valves during disinfection.Check the residual
with orthotolidin solution.
15.1.5 When the chlorine residual concentration, calculated on
the volume of water the piping will contain, indicated not less
than 50 ppm(parts per million) at all outlets, then all valves
shall be closed and secured.
15.1.6 The residual chlorine shall be retained in the piping
�-- system for a period of not less than 24 hours.
15.1.7 After the retention, the residual shall be not less than 5
ppm. If less, then the process shall be repeated as described
above.
15.1.8 If satisfactory, then all fixtures shall be flushed with
r- clean potable water until residual chlorine by ortholin tests
shall not be greater than the incoming water supply.
15.1.9 All work and certification of performance shall be
"^ performed by approved applicators or qualified personnel with
chemical and laboratory experience. Certification of performance
shall indicate:
15.1.9.1 Name and Location:
15.1.9.2 Material used for disinfection
15.1.9.3 Retention period
15.1.9.4 ppm chlorine during retention
15.1.9.5 ppm chlorine after flushing
15.1.9.6 statement that disinfection was performed as specified
15.1.9.7 signature and address of company /person performing
disinfection
15.1 Disinfection -Testing:
15.1.1 Upon completion of final flushing(after retention period)
the contractor shall obtain a minimum of one water sample from
each hot and cold water line and submit samples to a state or
county approved laboratory. Sample shall be taken from faucets
located at highest floor and furthest from main water supply. The
lab report shall show the following:
15.1.1.1 Name and address of laboratory
15.1.1.2 Name and location of project and date of samples
15.1.1.3 The coliform organism count.
15.1.1.4 If analysis does not satisfy the above minimum
requirements, the disinfection shall be repeated.
15.1.2 Before acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall
submit to Owner for his review, three copies of the laboratory
report and three copies of the Certification of Performance.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 15C-9
SECTION 15D
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of supports, anchors, and seals specified in this section
include the following:
Insulated Piping Supports.
Non -Insulated Piping Supports.
Intermediate Components.
Building Attachments.
Speciality Supports.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.1 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing codes
pertaining to product materials and installation of supports,
anchors, and seals.
2.2 MSS Standard Compliance:
2.2.1 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials,
design, and manufacture comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58.
2.2.2 Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with
MSS SP-69.
2.2.3 Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying
with MSS SP-89.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of support,
anchor, and seal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
4.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated piping
hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP 58, of one of the
MSS types listed. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each
piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit
pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping
insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide
copper -plated hangers and supports for copper -piping systems.
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 15D-1
4.2 Insulated Piping Supports: Auto -Grip insul-speed hanger; Fee and
Mason fig. 800.
4.3 Non -Insulated Piping Supports:
4.3.1 Copper Piping: Auto -Grip Swivel Ring Hanger, Fee and Mason
fig. 500.
4.3.2 Non -Copper Piping: Auto -Grip Swivel Rinbg Hanger, Fee and
Mason fig. 400.
4.3.3 Two -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8, Fee and Mason fig. 241.
4.4 Intermediate Components: Threaded Rod, Fee and Mason figs. 267,
267AL or 263 as appropiate.
4.5 Building Attachments:
4.5.1 Where possible, support pipe by attaching threaded rod to
the top or bottom chord of open span steel joists. Connect with
nut and washer. Where other means of attachment is required,
coordinate with Engineer prior to installation.
4.5.2 Rod Attachment Concrete Plate: Equal to B-Line Figure B
3085.
r,
4.6 Speciality Supports:
4.6.1 Trapeze Hangers: For multiple -parallel pipe lines use
manufactured trapeze -type hanger equal to "Uni-strut". Provide
pipe clamp for each pipe, sized to fit around pipe AND
insulation.
�., 4.6.2 Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by
manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5. INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS:
5.1 Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required
locations for proper piping support. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install
additional building attachments where support is required for
additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
5.2 Trapeze Hangers: Provide pipe clamps and resilient bushings for
all trapeze -supported piping. Where piping of various sizes is to be
supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 15D-2
Pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe
size.
5.3 Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do
not support piping from other piping.
5.4 Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,
bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as
otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for
adjacent similar piping.
5.5 Supporting Pipe with Steel Joists: Do NOT route any pipe so as
to be supported by webbing of steel joists in leiu of specified
hangers.
5.7 Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of
hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized
industry methods.
5.8 P,rovisions for Movement: Install hangers and supports to allow
controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops; expansion bends and similar units.
5.9 Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping
live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be
transmitted to connected equipment.
5.10 Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated
pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI
B31 are not exceeded.
5.11 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation
requirements.
5.11.1 Shields and Saddles: Where low -compressive -strength
insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled
water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8" and
over, install wood insulation saddles.
Trimming Insulation Around Hangers: Do not trim insulation around
any hanger. Install pipe initally in final position; utilize
spacer below pipe during inital installation. insulation shall
continue unchanger through hangers.
END OF SECTION 15D
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 15D-3
SECTION 15E
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of valves specified in this section include the following:
Gate Valves.
Ball Valves.
Swing Check.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP-25.
2.2 Valve Type: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications and
installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type
of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart' for each type and
size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure
number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve.
3.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists
for each type of valve. Include this data in Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
4. VALVES:
4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by
manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types
and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with
pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is
indicated, selection is Installer's option.
5. GATE VALVES:
5.1 Packing: Select valves designed for repacking under pressure
when fully opened, equipped with packing suitable for intended
service. Select valves designed so back seating protects packing
and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened, and equipped
with gland follower.
VALVES 15E-1
5.2 Comply with the following standards:
Cast -Iron Valves: MSS SP-70.
Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80.
Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34.
5.3 For Domestic Water Service:
5.3.1 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze
body,screwed bonnet, nonrising stem, solid wedge.
6. BALL VALVES:
6.1 General: Select with port area equal to or greater than
connecting pipe area, include seat ring designed to hold sealing
material.
6.2 Comply with the following standards:
Cast -Iron Valves: MSS SP-72.
Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34.
6.3 For Domestic Water Service:
6.3.1 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze 2 piece
body, bronze ball, bronze stem.
7. SWING CHECK VALVES:
7.1 General:. Construct pressure containing parts of valves as
follows:
Bronze Valves, 125 or 150 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 62.
Metallic Seated Bronze Valves, 200 or 300 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 61.
Iron Body Valves: ANSI/ASTM A 126, Grade
7.2 Comply with MSS SP-71 for design, workmanship, material and
testing.
7.3 Construct valves of pressure castings free of any impregnating
materials.
7.4 Construct valves of bronze, regrinding, with seating angle 40
deg. to 45 deg., unless composition disc is specified.
7.5 Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, unless
otherwise
7.6 Construct disc and hanger as separate parts, with disc free to
rotate.
7.7 Support hanger pins.on both ends by removable side plugs.
VALVES 15E-2
7.8 For Domestic Water Service:
7.8.1 Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body,
screwed cap, horizontal swing, bronze disc.
8. VALVE FEATURES:
8.1 General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not
otherwise indicated, provide proper valve features as determined by
Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ANSI B31.1.
8.2 Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
8.3 Solder -Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
�— 8.4 Trim: Fabricate pressure -containing components of valve,
including stems (shafts) and seats from brass or bronze materials,
of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing industry:
8.5 Non -Metallic Disc: Non -Metallic material selected for service
indicated in accordance with manufacturer's published literature.
8.6 Renewable Seat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and
assemble valve so disc can be replaced when worn.
8.7 Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 2" minimum, to
accommodate insulation applied over valve.
8.8 Bonnet: Part of gate or globe valve through which stem passes
^� to valve body, and attached to valve body by screws, bolts, union or
welding.
8.9 Double Disc: Two-piece tapered disc in gate valve, designed for
contact on one side of each disc.
8.10 Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y): Stem and handwheel designed to
rise out of bonnet or yoke as valve is operated from closed to open
position.
8.11 Inside Screw, Non -Rising Stem: Stem and handwheel designed to
rotate without rising when valve is operated from closed to open
position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
9. INSTALLATION:
9.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the
following requirements.
VALVES 15E-3
9.2 Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and
equipment including valves in branch lines where necessary to
isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible
and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
9.3 Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward for horizontal
plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose -end
adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below
horizontal plane.
9.4 Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -
stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.
9.5 Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of
metal other than cast iron where thermal or mechanical shock is
indicated or can be expected to occur.
9.6 Applications Subject to Corrosion: Do not install bronze valves
and valve components in direct contact with steel, unless bronze and
steel. are separated by dielectric insulator. Install bronze valves.
in steam and condensate service and in other services where
corrosion is indicated or can be expected to occur.
9.7 Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise
indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or
types of pipe/tube connections:
9.7.1 Tube Size 2" and Smaller': Soldered -joint valves.
9.8 Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and
yoke stems, except provide inside screw non -rising stem valves where
headroom prevents full opening of OS H valves.
9.9 Non -Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves
with non-metallic discs to locations indicated and where foreign
material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff
of metal seated valves.
9.10 Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable
seats, except where otherwise indicated.
9.11 Installation of Check Valves:
9.11.1 Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with
hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to center line of pipe.
Install for proper direction of flow.
END OF SECTION 15E
VALVES 15E-4
SECTION 15F
'— MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include
the following:
Piping System Insulation:
Domestic Water Piping Systems.
Refrigerant Piping System.
Ductwork System Insulation:
Dual Temperature Ductwork.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation
(insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives)
.- with flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rating
of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation.
.^ 3.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement
material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this
data in maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS:
4.1 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Comply with FS HH-I-558, Form D,
Type III, Class 12 for piping where highest temperature does not
exceed 450 deg. F (232 deg C). Provide Certainteed "Snap-On ASJ-SSL"
molded one-piece fiberglass insulation with K value of 0.23 at 75
deg F. Provide with all service jacket with self -seal lap.
4.2 Fiberglass Pipe Fitting Insulation: FS HH-I-558, Form E, Class
12. Provide Certainteed "Snap -Form" insulation and premolded fitting
covers, or approved equal. Provide Class 16 for use with class 12
fiberglass pipe insulation, where temperature does not exceed 450
deg F (232 deg C).
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-1
4.3 Vapor Barrier Material: FS HH-B-100, Type I, paper -backed
aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated, strength and
permeability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation
jacketing.
4.4 Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications indicated.
4.5 Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by
insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
5. EXPANDED CLOSED -CELL PIPE INSULATION:
5.1 Pipe Insulation: Comply with FS HH-I-5738, Class T-Tublar.
Provide Armaflex brand or approved equal.
5.2 Expanded Closed -Cell Insulation Adhesive: Mil-A-24179A and
Amend-2, as Type II, Class 1. Provide Armstrong 520 or approved
equal.
5.3 Expanded Closed Cell Insulation Tape: Provide "Armaflex
Insulation Tape" or approved equal. Tape shall be of same material
as insulation and be 1/8" thick; 2" wide.
5.4 Expanded Closed Cell Insulation Exterior Protective Finish:
Provide "Armaflex Finish" or approved equal. Finish shall be white
vinyl lacquer -type coating. Provide either brush -on or spray -on.
6. DUCT LINER INSULATION MATERIALS:
6.1 Comply with FS HH-I-545B. Provide Certainteed "Ultralite Type
300" or approved equal. Provide 1" thick insulation unless specified
otherwise. Comply with requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. Comply with
Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA) AHC-101.
6.2 Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with Adhesive and Sealant Council,
Inc. (ASC) ASC-A-7001.
6.3 Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA MF-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7. APPLICATIONS OF FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION:
7.1 Insulation Omitted:
7.1.1 Omit insulation on exposed Plumbing fixture runouts from
faces of wall or floor to fixture; on unions, flanges, strainers,
flexible connections, and expansion joints.
7.2 Cold Piping: Insulate the following cold piping systems:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-2
Domestic cold water piping.
7.2.1 Insulate each piping system specified above with_1" thick
fiberglass insulation.
7.3 Hot Piping: Insulate the following hot piping systems:
Domestic hot water piping.
7.3.1 Insulate each.piping system specified above with: 1" thick
fiberglas (for pipe sizes up to and including 6") or 1-1/2" thick
fiberglass (for pipe sizes over 6").
8. APPLICATIONS OF CLOSED -CELL PIPING INSULATION:
8.1 Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on cold piping within unit
cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; and on unions,
flanges, strainers.
8.2 Cold Piping: Insulate the following cold piping systems:
.� Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and
compressors.
8.2.1 Insulate each piping system specified above with: 1/2"
thick expanded closed -cell insulation (for pipe sizes up to and
including 2") or 3/4" thick closed cell (for pipe sizes over 2").
9. INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
9.1 General: Install insulation products in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its
intended purpose.
9.2 Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and
acceptance of tests.
9.3 Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
9.4 Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of
insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut
^, pieces or scraps abutting each other.
9.5 Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulation. Butt
insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit
over surfaces to covered.
.a 9.6 Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation,
and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-3
9.7 Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system
with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied
to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form
or type is indicated.
9.8 Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls,
floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise
indicated.
9.9 Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever
needed to prevent commpression of insulation-.
9.10 Pipe Hanger Insulation Inserts: Butt pipe insulation against
pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3 inch wide
vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping
apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal
joints with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.
10. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIBERGLASS INSULATION:
10.1 Close self -seal lap in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
10.2 Seal ends of pipe insulation with vapor barrior at all valves,
fittings, and at all butt joints.
10.3 Provide fittings with molded fiberglass covers and secure with
20 gauge corrosion resistent wire and apply a smoothing coat of
insulating cement. Vapor seal with premolded fitting cover. Cover
shall.overlap the adjoining insulation and jackets shall be sealed
at the edges with vapor barrier adhesive. The end of all covers
shall be secured with pressure sensitive vinyl tape. Tape shall
overlap jacket and cover one inch.
10.4 Special Requirements for Exposed Fiberglass Insulation:
10.4.1 Piping: Apply aluminum metal jacket 0.016" with moisture
barrier around pipe and slip edge into preformed z-lock position
to shed water. Butt next jacket section leaving approximately
3/8" gap. Place preformed 2" butt strap with sealant over the
seam and secure with 1/2" aluminum band and wing seal.
10.4.2 Fittings: Apply coat of weatherproof mastic by spray or
trowel. Embed into wet coat a layer of glass cloth. Smooth
membrane to avoid wrinkles and overlap all seam by at least 2".
Apply a second coat of the same coating to the entire surface.
11. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPANDED CLOSED CELL INSULATION:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-4
11.1 Piping:
11.1.1 Install unslit insulation over piping wherever possible.
Where insulation must be installed after piping installation is
complete, cut tubular insulation lengthwise in a straight, smooth
..� cut. Snap insulation over piping and apply Armstrong 520 adhesive
continuously down the length of the seam.
11.1.2 Apply Armstrong 520 adhesive to all butt joints and seams.
11.2 Fittings:
11.2.1 Provide fitting insulation fabricated from miter -cut
tublar insulation. After placement of the miter -cut insulation,
wrap each fitting throughly with Armaflex Insulation Tape or
approved equal. Apply Armstrong 520 adhesive to all joints of
fitting insulation.
r-
11.2.2 Provide molded plastic fitting cover which shall overlap
pipe insulation. Apply Armstron 520 adhesive to all joints.
12. Exterior Insulation: After installation of insulation, fitting
covers, application of adhesive, and taping of fitting covers; apply
Armstrong "Armaflex Finish" on all exterior insulation. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations.
13. APPLICATIONS OF DUCTWORK INSULATION:
13.1 Dual Temperature Ductwork: Insulate all the following ducts
systems:
Supply air,
Return air,
Outside air,
Exhaust air.
13.1.1 Insulate each ductwork system specified above with duct
liner unless specified otherwise.
�,.. 14. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
14.1 General: Install insulation products in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its
intended purpose.
�- 15. INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER INSULATION:
15.1 Install liner in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
.,, and with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard (1975) based on the
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-5
design air velocity ranges in regards to adhesives, mechanical
fastenings and spacings.
15.2 Attach liner to sheet metal using adhesive covering 100% of the
metal.
15.3 Provide mechanical fasteners spaced as follows:
15.3.1 Ends of duct: 3" from end of duct and lateral spacing of
no more than 6" o.c.
15.3.2 Mid -section of duct: 16" spacing, both longitudinal (in
direction of air flow)and transverse (across the duct).
15.4 Coat upstream edge of liner with adhesive. Provide metal nosing
for air velocities above 4000 FPM.
16. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:
16.1 Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired
satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and
moisture saturated units.
16.2 Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of
required protection for insulation work during remainder of
construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 15F
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15F-6
11"
SECTION 15G NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1.1 See Section 15C - PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS for general piping
requirements.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI
B31.2 "Fuel Gas Piping".
2.2 National Fuel Gas Code Compliance: Comply with applicable
provisions of NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) "National Fuel Gas Code", and
ANSI Z223.1a "Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3. NATURAL GAS PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
3.1 Gas Service Piping:
3.1.1 Pipe Sizes 2" through 12": Reinforced epoxy resin gas
pressure pipe and fittings complying with ASTM D 2517.
3.2 Building Distribution Piping:
3.2.1 Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Schedule 40, black steel pipe
with malleable iron threaded.
3.2.2 Pipe Size 2-1/2" and Larger: Schedule 40, black steel pipe
with wrought -steel buttwelding.
4. SPECIAL VALUES:
4.1 Gas Cocks 2" and Smaller: 150 psi non -shock WOG, bronze
straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded ends.
4.2 Gas Cocks 2-1/2" and Larger: 125 psi non -shock WOG, iron body
bronze mounted, straightway cock, square head, flanged ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5. INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING:
5.1 General: Install natural gas distribution piping in accordance
with Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section "Pipe, Tube,
NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 15G-1
and Fittings"; and in accordance with applicable codes and local
Utility Company requirements.
5.2 Use sealants on metal gas piping threads which are chemically
resistant to natural gas. Use sealants sparingly, and apply to only
male threads of metal joints.
5.3 Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.
5.4 Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe
with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged.
5.5 Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or
cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing
piping, or equipment connections are completed.
5.6 Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project,
and bond tightly to grounding connection.
5.7 Install drip -legs in gas piping where indicated, and where -
required by code or regulation.
5.8 Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at
bottom of pipe risers.
5.9 Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined
together.
5.10 Install piping with 1" drop in 60' pipe run (0.14%) in
direction of flow.
5.11 Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum
of 12" clearance between gas piping and steam or hot water piping
above 200 deg. F (93 deg. Q .
5.12 For piping buried in building substrate, or below floor slabs,
install in welded conduit, ventilated to outdoors on both ends, and
tested to same requirements as gas piping.
6. GAS SERVICE:
6.1 General: Arrange with Utility Compnay to provide gas service to
indicated location with shutoff at terminus. Consult with Utility
as to extent of it's work, costs, fees, and permits involved. Pay
such costs and fees; obtain permits.
6.2 Extend service pipe from Utility's terminus to inside building
wall, under Utility's direction.
6.3 Provide shutoff outside building.
NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 15G-2
6.4 Extentions to Existing Gas Piping: Route new piping to existing
gas piping as shown and connect. Provide new shutoff valve at
connection to main. Inspact site to determine degree of difficulity
in attaching to existing line.
7. INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
7.1 Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas -
fired equipment item; and on risers and branches where indicated.
7.2 Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be
protected from possible injury.
8. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
8.1 General: Connect gas piping to each gas -fired equipment item
with drip leg and shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
^� END OF SECTION 15G
NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 15G-3
SECTION 15H
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1.1 See Section 15C for general pipe requirements.
2. APPLICATIONS:
2.1 Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings
including soil stacks, vent stacks, horizontal branches, traps, and
connections to fixtures and. drains.
2.2 Underground building drain piping including mains, branches,
traps connections to fixtures and drains, connections to stacks,
terminating at connection to sanitary sewers 10 feet outside inner
face of foundation wall.
2.3 Exterior sanitary sewer system from building piping termination
to municipal sewer connection.
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
3.1 Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of
the local plumbing code pertaining to plumbing materials,
construction and installation of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. SOIL AND WASTE PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
4.1 Above Ground Piping Within Buildings: Provide service weight
hubless cast-iron soil pipe, with hubless cast-iron soil pipe
fittings and no -hub joints.
4.2 Underground Piping Within Building: Provide service weight cast-
iron hub -and -spigot soil pipe with cast-iron, hub -and -spigot soil
pipe fittings and compression gasket joints.
4.3 Exterior Building Piping: Provide standard weight polyvinyl
chloride sewer pipe (PVC) with solvent weld PVC sewer pipe fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING DRAIN AND EXTERIOR DRAIN PIPING:
5.1 General: Install underground building drains and project
exterior waste piping as indicated and in accordance with local
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING 15H-1
plumbing code. Lay underground building drains beginning at low
point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing
upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and
other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping
of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
5.2 Install soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope
of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot
(17.) for piping 4" and larger.
6. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
6.1 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping
runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of
sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by plumbing
code.
6.2 Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor -
slab supporting fixtures or drains.
6.3 Stub -Out for Future Sink: Provide waste stub out in wall and
associated vent pipe up through roof. Provide cap at wall waste
connection.
END OF SECTION 15H
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING
15H-2
r-
SECTION 15I
DOIIESTIC WATER ING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1.1 See Section 15C - Pipe Tube and Fittings for general piping
requirements.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of
local plumbing code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction
and installation of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
3.1 Above gradepiping: Provide type L, hard -drawn temper copper pipe
with wrought -copper, solder -joints fittings.
3.2 Belowgrade Piping (outside building): Provide unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40 plastic water pipe with solvent
weld joint fittings.
4. BASIC VALVES:
4.1 Provide the following valves:
4.1.1 Sectional Valves:
2" and Smaller: Ball Valves.
2-1/2" and Larger: Gate Valves.
4.1.2 Shutoff Valves:
2" and Smaller: Ball Valves.
2-1/2" and Larger: Gate Valves.
4.1.3 Check Valves:
All Sizes: Swing Check Valves.
5. SPECIAL VALVES:
5.1 General: Special valves required for domestic water piping
systems include the following types:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15I-1
5.1.1 Hose Bibbs: Soldered End: Bronze body, renewable
composition disc, wheel handle, 3/4" solder inlet, 3/4" hose
outlet, vacuum breaker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
6. INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPING:
6.1 General: Install water piping system in compliance with local
governing regulations.
6.2 Water Service Piping: Extend water service piping of size and
in location indicated to water service entrance at building.
Provide
sleeve in foundation wall for water service entry; make entry
watertight. Provide gate valve at water service entry inside
building; strainer, pressure gage, test tee with valve.
6.3 Copper Tube: Install in accordance with recommended procedures
of the Copper Development Association.
6.4 Sterilization: At completion of water service line
installation, flush and sterilize in conformance with AWWA C-601, to
satisfaction of local authorities having jurisdiction.
6.5 Piping drops for hose bibbs in South Addition: Route all piping
exposed in the space from the ceiling down to the level of the hose
bibb. Attach to wall with uni-strut and pipe clamps (provide
resilient grommets between pipe and supports, to prevent
electrolisis). Provide a minimum of two hose clamps, one within 6"
of ceiling and one within 6" of hose bibb.
6.6 Piping Drops in north Addition: All piping shall be routed
within walls unless specifically noted otherwise.
7. INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
7.1 Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to
main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or
equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated.
7.2 Shuttoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment
item, at connection to existing underground piping (at service) and
on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.
7.3 Check Valves: Install at connection to existing piping so that
new pipe may be disinfected.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15I-2
7.4 Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated, with
vacuum breaker.
7.5 Hydrants: Installed where indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
8. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
8.1 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping
runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than
required by local plumbing code.
8.2 Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water
piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with
equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide shutoff
valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain
connection.
END OF SECTION 15I
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15I-3
SECTION 15J
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the
following:
Domestic Water Heaters.
Residential gas -fired water heaters.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical
components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been
listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA
standards.
2.2 NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA
t, 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of
ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment.
2.3 ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54) "National
Fuel Gas Code", as applicable to installation of gas -fired water
heaters.
2.4 AGA and NSF Labels: Provide water heaters which have been
listed and labeled by American Gas Association and National
Sanitation Foundation.
2.5 ASME Relief Valve Stamps: Provide water heaters with safety
relief valves bearing ASME valve markings.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment
specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and capacity
and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated.
3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
all components.
3.3 Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all
components, clearly indicating all required field electrical
connections.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15J-1
3.4 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for
each item of plumbing equipment. Include "trouble -shooting
maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS:
4.1 Residential Gas -Fired Water Heaters:
4.1.1 General: Provide residential gas -fired water heaters of
size and capacity as indicated on schedule. Comply with
ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90A for energy efficiency.
4.1.2 Heater: Working pressure of 150 psi; 3/4" tapping for
relief valve; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal
surfaces exposed to water.
4.1.3 Safety Controls: Equip with automatic gas shutoff device
to shut off entire gas supply in event of excessive temperature -
in tank; and pilot safety shutoff.
4.1.4 Draft Hood: Equip with AGA certified draft hood.
4.1.5 Jacket: Insulate tank with vermin -proof glass fiber
insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish.
4.1.6 Warranty: Furnish 5 year limited warranty for tank
leakage.
4.1.7 Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4" relief valve;
radiant floor shield; cold water dip tube.
4.1.8 Controls: Provide gas pressure regulator; pilot gas
regulator; adjustable thermostat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
5. INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS:
5.1 Gas -Fired Water Heaters:
5.1.1 General: Install gas -fired water heaters as indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in
compliance with applicable codes.
5.1.2 Supports: Set units on concrete pads, orient so controls
and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.
5.1.3 Level and plumb unit.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15J-2
r-
5.1.4 Gas Supply: Connect to gas line with drip leg, tee, gas
cock, and union; full size of unit inlet connection. Locate
piping so as not to interfere with service of unit.
5.1.5 Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with
shutoff valves and unions. Connect recirculation water line to
unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
5.1.6 Flue: Connect flue to draft hood with gas -tight
connection.
5.1.7 Start -Up: Start-up, test, and adjust gas -fired water
heaters in accorcance with manufacturer's start-up instructions,
and Utility Company's requirements. Check and calibrate
controls, adjust burner for maximum efficiency.
END OF SECTION 15420
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15J-3
SECTION 15K
FIXTURESPLUMBING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Provide and install plumbing fixtures as indicate and as
specified. Provide complete units with all necessary components.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of
local plumbing code pertaining to materials and installation of
plumbing fixtures.
2.2 ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards
pertaining to plumbing fixtures and systems, and bath tub units.
2.3 PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by Plumbing
and Drainage Institute pertaining to plumbing fixture supports.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for plumbing
fixtures and trim, including catalog cut of each fixture type and
trim item furnished, roughing -in dimensioned.drawings, templates for
cutting substrates, fixture carriers, and installation instructions.
3.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for
each fixture type and trim item, including instructions for care of
finishes. Include this data in maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. PLUMBING FIXTURES:
4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated fixtures of type, style and
material indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture
manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as
indicated by their published product information; either as designed
and constructed, or as recommended by the manufacturer, and as
required for a complete installation. Where type is not otherwise
indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations.
4.1:1 Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by
manual, automatic or remote control), provide commercial quality
faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and size
indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15K-1
manual shutoff valves and connection stem pipes to permit outlet
servicing withoutshut-down of water supply piping systems.
4.1.2 Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required
by governing regulations, including locations where water outlets
are equipped for hose attachment.
4.1.3 P-Traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are
indicated for direct connection to drainage system.
4.1.4 Carriers: Provide cast-iron supports for fixtures of
either graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron as
indicated.
4.1.5 Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed
fixture bolt caps finished to match fixture finish.
4.1.6 Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate
walls in exposed locations, provide chrome plated cast -brass
escutcheons with set screw.
4.1.7 Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health
Departments having jurisdiction.
5. PLUMBING FIXTURES:
^' 5.1 BS(BAR SINK): Counter -mounted self -rimming, 18 ga stainless
steel. Provide with dual handle goose -neck bar faucet, lift -out
basket strainers, chrome plated p-trap with cleanout, and 3/8"
wheel -type stops.
Fixture: Elkay BLR-15
Faucet: Elkay LK-2088-13
Tailpiece: Elkay LK-99
5.2 EWCA(ELECTRIC WATER COOLER): Provide wall -mounted water cooler
with refrigerant equipment located below drinking level and with 4ea
electronically -controlled touch pads and built-in pressure
regulator. Cooler shall provide 7 gph of 50 deg F water at 80 deg F
. inlet. Provide with five year warranty. Provide chrome plated p-trap
with cleanout and supply pipe with angle stop. Coordinate with
Architect on color prior to ordering.
Fixture: Oasis OEP8WM-EQ
5.3 CO(FLOOR CLEANOUT:) Cast iron floor cleanout with spigot outlet
for no hub or gasket seal connection, threaded adjustable housing,
flanged ferrole with plug and round secured nickel bronze scoriated
top. Provide carpet flanged top, synthetic covering top, tile top,
�., heavy duty top or terrazzo top for floor surfaces other than
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15K-2
concrete. Contractor coordinate top selection with adjoining floor
material.
Fixture: Wade W-6000
5.4 CO(WALL CLEANOUT:) Provide cleanout tee with brass plug and
round stainless steel secured access cover.
Fixture: Wade W-8460-C
5.5 FDA(FLOOR DRAIN:) 3" cast iron w/ integral reversible clamping
collar and 5" diameter nickel brass strainer. Provide w/ deep seal
p-trap with cleanout.
Fixture: Wade W-1103
5.6 HB(HOSE BIBB, INTERIOR): 3/4" angle valve with integral vacuum
breaker.
Faucet: Nibco fig #763VB
5.7 LC(LAVATORY:) Wall -mounted, 20"x18" enameled cast iron, low
back lavatory with wall hanger. Provide with single control lavatory
fitting, 3/8" wall supplies with wall flange and wheel handle,
chrome plated p-trap with cleanout, and grid strainer with offset
tailpiece.
Fixture: Eljer 052-0174
Faucet: Eljer 557-1120
Tailpiece: Eljer 803-0530
5.8 U(URINAL:) Wall -mounted, vitreous, washout with exposed flush
valve. Provide with carriers and removable beehive strainer.
Fixture: Eljer 161-1030
Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 186
5.9 WCC(WATER CLOSET, FLOOR -MOUNTED, VALVE -TYPE, HANDICAPPED]):
Floor -mounted, siphon jet, elongated, vitreous china closet bowl
with exposed flush valve. Provide w/ flat bolt covers, and open -
front white plastic seat w/o lid, handicapped height.
Fixture: Eljer 111-1245
Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 110-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
6.1 Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at
indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15K-3
instructions, roughing -in drawings, and with recognized industry
practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements
and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of
the National Standard Plumbing Code pertaining to installation of
plumbing fixtures.
7. CLEAN AND PROTECT:
7.1 Clean plumbing fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of
installation.
7.2 Protect installed fixtures from damage during the remainder of
the construction period.
8. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
8.1 Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after
units are water pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability
and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate complaince,
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with
retesting.
8.2 Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible,
restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove
fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be
judged by Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and
replace with new units.
END OF SECTION 15K
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15K-4
SECTION 15L
REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS:
1.1 See Section -15C for general piping requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. REFRIGERATION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
2.1 Tube Size 7/8: through 4 1/8": Copper tube.
Wall Thickness: Type ACR, hard drawn temper.
Fittings: Wrought -copper, brazed -joints.
Joints: Brazed, American Welding Society(AWS)
classification BCUP-4 for brazing filler metal.
2.1 Tube Size 3/4" and Smaller: Copper Tube
Wall Thickness: Type ACR, hard drawn temper.
Fittings: Cast copper -alloy for flared copper tubes.
Joints: Flared.
3. SPECIAL REFRIGERATION VALVES:
3.1 General: Special valves required for refrigeration piping
systems include the following types:
3.2 Globe Shutoff Valves: Forged brass, packed, back seating,
winged seal cap, 300 degree F (149 deg. C) temperature rating, 500
psi working pressure.
3.3 Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft
synthetic seat, fully guided brass piston and stainless steel
spring, 250 deg. F(121 C) temperature rating, 500 psi working
pressure.
4. REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES:
4.1 Refrigerant Strainers: Brass shell and end connections, brazed
joints, monel screen, 100 mesh, UL listed, 350 psi working pressure.
4.2 Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port,
removable cap, polished optical glass, solder connections, UL
listed, 200 deg. F (93 deg C) temperature rating; 500 psi working
pressure.
REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEMS 15L-1
4.3 Refrigerant Filter -Driers: Steel shell, ceramic fired desiccant
core, solder connections, UL listed, 500 psi working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
�^ 5. INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION PIPING:
5.1 Pitch refrigerant piping in direction of oil return to
compressor.
5.2 Provide oil traps and double risers where indicated, and where
required to provide oil return.
6. INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL REFRIGERATION VALVES:
6.1 Remove accessible internal parts before soldering or brazing,
replace after joints are completed.
7. INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES:
7.1 Refrigerant Strainers: Install in refrigerant lines as
indicated, and in accessible location for service.
7.2 Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Install as indicated on refrigerant
liquid lines, in accessible location.
7.3 Refrigerant Filter -Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as
indicated, and in accessible location for service.
8. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
8.1 General: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment in
manner shown, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions
where not otherwise indicated.
9. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
9.1 Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean
and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5,
"Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen,
using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27"
vacuum, and then 200 psi using halide torch. System must be
entirely leak -free.
9.1.1 Engineer shall be present for refrigerant piping test.
Coordinate test date and time with Engineer.
9.2 Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate
leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION 15L
REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEMS 15L-2
SECTION 15M
SPLII SYSTEMS
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of equipment required for this project include the
following:
Furnace and Coil.
Pad -Mounted Condensing Unit.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have
been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
2.2 ANSI Complaince: Comply with applicable provisions of of ANSI
B31.2 "Fuel Gas Piping".
2.3 NFPA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NFPA 54, "National
Fuel Gas Code".
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, including
rated capacities, weights, and installation instructions.
3.2 Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly
indicating all required field electrical connections, to include
connections between different pieces of equipment.
3.3 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of
equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. UPFLOW FURNACE AND COIL:
4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated, self contained furnace and
coil assembly of types, sizes, capacities, and ratings indicated;
consisting of those components and accessories required for a
complete installation; constructed with manufacturer's standard
materials and components, and manufacturer designed for the
application indicated. Provide units with the following components
and performance features:
4.2 Cooling capacity: Provide direct -expansion type coolingthrough
the use of attached/integral cooling coil. Coil shall be supplied
complete with controls, insulated drip pan, drain connections,
refrigerant piping connections, and unit casing (if required). Coil
SPLIT SYSTEMS 15M-1
r-
shall be a standard manufacturer's product designed for use with the
furnace and condensing unit submitted and designed for the
refrigerant proposed.
4.3 Heating Capacity: Provide natural gas heating system consisting
of cold rolled steel sectional heat exchanger and aluminized steel
tapered burners. Ignition shall be provided by electronic ignition.
4.4 Controls: Controls shall include gas valve which regulates gas
flow, filters pilot gas, provides manual main burner and pilot
shutoff; prewired indoor fan relay with transformer on
heating/cooling furnaces; a low voltage heating/cooling thermostat.
Such gas control accessories shall be provided such that a fully
automatic system that is listed in the AGA Directory of Certified
Appliance and Accessories shall result.
4.5 Air Filters: Provide built-in filter rack complete with
reuseable filter.
4.6 Flue: Furnace shall include a drafthood permitting connection
with double -wall flue pipe.
-., 5. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT:
5.1 General: Provide a factory -assembled and tested air-cooled
condensing unit as indicated, consisting of a compressor, condenser
coil, fan, motor, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls.
Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled.
5.2 Casing: Provide 18 gage galvanized steel casing finished with
baked enamel. Provide removable panel for access to control, and
weepholes for water drainage. Provide base with mounting holes.
Provide brass service valves, fittings and guage ports on exterior
of casing.
5.3 Compressor: Provide welded hermetic with built-in overloads and
vibration isolation. Provide for compressor motor, thermal and
current sensitive overload device, internal high-pressure
protection, high and low pressure cutout switches, start capacitor
and relay, 2 pole contactor, crankcase heater and temperature
actuated switch and timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.
5.4 Condenser: Construct coil of copper tubes and aluminum fins,
provided with liquid accumulator and liquid subcooler. Provide
aluminum propellar fan, direct driven, with permanently lubricated
fan motor with thermal overload protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSTALLATION OF FURNACES AND FURNACE & COILS:
SPLIT SYSTEMS 15M-2
6.1 The furnace installation shall conform to the requirements
contained in NFPA 90A or 90B as applicable. Combustion air supply
and ventilation shall be in accordance with 1979 UMC.
6.2 Foundations, settings, or suspensions for mounting equipment and
accessories including supports, vibration isolator stands, guides,
and brackets shall be provided. Suspension for equipment shall
conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
6.3 Equipment shall be located as indicated and in such a manner
that working space is available for necessary servicing, such as
replacing or adjusting drives, motors, air filters, and automatic
controls. Electrical isolation shall be provided between dissimilar
metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion. The
interior of cabinets or casings shall be cleaned before completion
of installation.
6.4 The furnace shall be connected to the stack with the specified
flue connections, in accordance with NFPA 211.
6.5 Install vertical furnaces on fabricated plenum.
6.6 Provide condensate drainage line from furnace and coil to nearby
santary vent. Connect via hub drain.
7. INSTALLATION OF AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNIT:
7.1 Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly
anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
7.2 Install ground -mounted units on 4" thick reinforced concrete
pad, 4" larger on each side than the condensing unit. Anchor unit
to pad using inserts or anchor bolts.
7.3 Connect refrigerant piping to condensing unit in manner so as
not to interfere with access to unit.
8. STARTUP:
8.1 Prior to startup, all equipment shall be cleaned, belts adjusted
and air filter installed. Safety and operating controls shall be
adjusted as necessary to place them in proper operation and
sequence.
8.2 Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer's startup
instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Burner safety controls shall be checked by simulating
flame failure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
SPLIT SYSTEMS 15M-3
Satisfactory operation of all heat -regulation controls and safety
controls shall be demonstrated.
8.3 All deficiencies discovered in the course of performancetesting
shall be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and a new item
installed. Testing shall resume with equipment repair or
replacement.
END OF SECTION 15M
SPLIT SYSTEMS
15M-4
SECTION 15N . EXHAUST S
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of equipment required for this project include the
following:
Roof -Mounted Explosion -Proof Exhaust Fans
Ceiling -Mounted Centrifugal Exhaust Fans
In -Line Explosion -Proof Exhaust Fans
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have
been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, including
rated capacities, weights, and installation instructions.
3.2 Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly
indicating all required field electrical connections, to include
connections between different pieces of equipment.
3.3 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of
equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
4.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard
prefabricated power ventilator units of type and size indicated,
modified as necessary to comply with requirements, and as required
for complete installation.
4.2 Control Switches: Unless specifically instructed otherwise,
provide each exhaust fan with factory -supplied variable speed
control switch. Where motor size or electrical characteristics
preclude variable speed operation, provide manual motor starter for
operation control (this is in addition to the manual motor starters
specified for motor isolation. Coordinate exact location of control
switches with Engineer prior to installation.
4.2.1 Install speed controller for explosion -proof fans outside
the Classl-Divisionl environment and label as "Exhaust Fan Speed
Control" and as "Circulation Fan Speed Control".
EXHAUST FANS 15N-1
5. CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS:
5.1 Roof -Mounted Explosion -Proof Centrifugal Exhaust Fans: Provide
Centrifugal roof -type power ventilators of type, size, and capacity
as scheduled, and as specified herein. Ensure than entire assembly
is rated for Class 1, Division 1, Category C usage.
5.1.1 Type: Centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven as scheduled.
Provide aluminum weatherproof housing. Provide square base to
suit roof curb. Provide permanent split -capacitor type motor for
direct driven fans; capacitor -start, induction -run type motor for
belt driven fans.
5.1.2 Electrical: Provide non -fusible type disconnect switch at
motor adjacent to the fan housing. Provide thermal overload
protection in fan motor.
5.1.3 Curbs: Provide factory -supplied insulated metal curbs to
fit the base of the roof ventilator. For metal roofs, provide
custom designed type with design to match building steel surface -
exactly.
.� 5.1.4 Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh,
16 ga. aluminum or brass wire.
5.1.5 Dampers: Provide motor -operated opposed blade dampers with
linkage in curb base. Dampers shall cycle open any time the motor
is running. Provide with explosion -proof damper motor.
5.1.6 Control with manual off/on switch located outside the room
and install switch in appropiate explosion -proof box.
5.2 Ceiling -Mounted Centrifugal Exhaust Fans: Provide ceiling
mounted fan equal to Greenheck model SP. Provide galvanized fan
housing and line with 1/2" acoustic lining and with integral
backdraft damper.
5.2.1 Arrange discharge for vertical.
5.2.2 Provide terminal box internally mounted for motor hookup.
5.2.3 Mount motor on resilient gromments.
5.2.4 Provide forward curved fan wheel, having AMCA seal for
sound and air rating.
5.2.5 Provide factory -supplied roof cap. Provide factory -supplied
speed control. Seal roof cap to roof throughly., do not cut any
roof seams with roof cap.
5.2.6 Control by switching with lights.
EXHAUST FANS 15N-2
5.3 In -Line Explosion -Proof Centrifugal Supply Fans: Provide belt -
drive in -line type supply fan with square shaped fan housing of
heavy guage formed steel.
5.3.1 Provide with one side hinged for easy removal of entire
drive assembly. Mount motor on hinged side exterior isolated
from the air stream. The belt and pillow block assembly shall be
protected from the air stream by enclosure. The shaft shall be
keyed to both wheel and pulley.
5.3.2 Provide spun aluminum venturi throat inlet.
5.3.3 Provide with AMCA air and sound ratings.
5.3.4 Support fan with threaded rod (from roof structure) and
neoprene grommets. Mount fan as high as possible.
5.3.5 Provide supply and return duct on inlet and exhaust of fan.
Provide both ducts from fan to a point 6" off floor.
5.3.6 Control with manual off/on switch located outside the room
and install switch in appropiate explosion -proof box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST FANS:
6.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install
ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that
ventilators serve their intended function.
6.2 Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofing, walls, and
ceilings, as necessary for proper interfacing.
6.3 Ensure that power ventilators are wired properly, with correct
motor rotation, and positive electrical motor grounding.
6.4 Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators.
Adjust dampers for free operation.
6.5 On all pitched roofs and elsewhere as specified, paint exhaust
fan to match to roof.
7. INSTALLATION OF SUPPLY FANS:
7.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install
ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that
ventilators serve their intended function.
EXHAUST FANS 15N-3
7.2 Install fans supported with rod on neoprene bushings.
7.3 Ensure that fans are wired properly, with correct motor
rotation, and positive electrical motor grounding.
8. STARTUP:
8.1 Prior to startup, all equipment shall be cleaned, belts adjusted
and air filter installed. Startup equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's startup instructions.
8.2 All deficiencies discovered in the course of performance testing
shall be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and a new item
installed. Testing shall resume with equipment repair or
replacement.
END OF SECTION 15N
EXHAUST FANS 15N-4
SECTION 15P
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of low pressure ductwork required for project include the
following:
Cooling/Heating supply and return air system.
Mechanical exhaust systems.
1.2 Ductwork components specified herein include the following:
Ductwork Materials.
Duct Accessories.
Outlets and Inlets.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standard" for fabrication and installation of low
pressure ductwork.
2.2 NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and
ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air -Conditioning Systems".
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on
manufactured products and factory -fabricated ductwork and duct
accessories.
3.2 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of
installed ductwork, duct accessories, and outlets and inlets.
3.3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on outlets and inlets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
4.1 Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be
exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free
from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other
imperfections, including those which would impair painting.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
15P-1
MW
4.2 Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork
from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527,
lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating; mill
phosphatized for exposed locations.
5. MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
5.1 Duct Sealant: Non -hardening, non -migrating mastic or liquid
elastic sealant (type applicable for fabrication/installation
detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically
for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
5.2 Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,
provide hot -dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods,
straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
6. METAL DUCTWORK FABRICATION:
6.1 DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWING ARE NET OPEN AREA. See Division 15
section "Mechanical Insulation" for information on thickness of duct
liner (if any).
6.2 Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless
otherwise indicated or required to complete runs.
6.3 Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying
with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standars - 5th Edition".
6.4 Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply
with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Limit angular
tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding
tapers. Make square elbows having 4 gores(90 degree) or 2 gores(45
degrees) as appropiate.
7. DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS:
8. Provide the following type duct system for each specific duct
system:
Cooling/Heating Supply/Return: Lined galvanized steel duct.
Exhaust: Unlined galvanized duct.
Circulation: Unlined galvanized duct.
9. DUCT ACCESSORIES:
-- 9.1 Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade
type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low
Pressure Duct Standards".
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-2
9.2 Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed
of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars
perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips
suitable for mounting in ductwork.
9.2.1 Provide metal turning vanes for fiber duct system and for
sheet metal duct systems.
9.3 Extractor: Provide extractor consisting of bank of curved blades
on two inch centers. Assemble so that each blade is synchronized
with the other and the entire unit pivots on base plate. Unit shall
pivot from full open to full closed with blades overlapping for full
shutoff. Components shall be manufacturered from the following
gages: blades-20ga, base-18 ga, straps-16ga. Provide with linkage
with 3/8" square hole for external operations. Provide Air-Trac
model EX-2 or approved equal.
9.4 Splitter Damper: Fabricate splitter damper from same material as
duct, of the following gages:
18" max dimen = 22 gal
19" max dimen = 16 gal
9.4.1 Fabricate damper so that length is 3/4 the width of the
smaller duct being split. Provide Young No. 656 3/8" end
bearings, No. 660 square CDS 3/8" rod, and Young U-bolts or
approved equal.
9.5 Duct Hardware: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by 1
manufacturer for all items on project. Provide the following:
9.5.1 Extractor Regulator, accessible ceilings: provide with
push-pull rod, rod extending through duct wall. Provide with
locking set -screw on rod.
9.5.2 Extractor Regulator, inaccessible ceilings: provide Young
No. 1, or approved equal, surface -mounted regulator. Provide with
Young No. 660 square CDS 3/8" rod, and Young No. 656 3/8" end
bearing.
9.5.3 Splitter Regulator: Provide Young No. S-900 3/8" steel rod
air -split regulator, or approved equal. Provide with cadmium
plated steel rod, 3 1/2 turns to the inch. Substitute Young No. 1
regulator for the standard regulator.
10. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
10.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard
ceiling/wall/floor/duct air distribution devices where shown; of
size, shape capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials
and components as indicated, and as required for complete
installation.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-3
10.2 SubStrata Compatibility: Provide diffusers/grilles/registers
~^ with border styles that are compatible with adjacent
ceiling/wall/floor systems. Refer to general construction drawings
and specifications for types of ceiling/wall/floor systems which
will contain each type of air distribution devices.
10.3 Types: Provide devices of type, capacity and with accessories
and finishes as listed on Air Distribution Schedule. The following
requirements shall apply unless noted otherwise.
10.3.1 Diffuser Faces: Provide square housing, core of square
concentric louvers, square or round duct connection (provide
round duct connection only where round duct called for on the
drawings).
10.3.2 Return Air Grilles: Provide perforated panel with square
frame.
10.3.3 Diffuser Mountings: Provide diffusers with flush perimeter
flange and gasket to seal against ceiling or provide diffuser
housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars
and rest on top surface of tee bar.
10.3.4 Diffuser Patterns: Provide adjustable louver face for 4
direction air flow unless specified otherwise.
10.4 Supply/Exhaust Dampers: Provide adjustable opposed blade damper
assembly, key operated from face of diffuser/grille on all supply
and exhaust diffuser or grilles unless specified otherwise.
10.5 Diffuser Accessories: Provide curved blade extractor mounted on
adjustable frame to product air scooping action in duct at diffuser
take -off. Provide tools designed to fit through diffuser face and
operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.
10.6 Diffuser Finishes: Provide semi -gloss white enamel prime finish
unless specified otherwise.
r- PART 3 - EXECUTION
11. INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCTWORK:
11.1 General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with
recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5%
leakage) and noiseless (no objectional noise) systems, capable of
performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of
joints. Align ductwork accurately at connection, within 1/8"
misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-4
11.2 Seal ductwork, after installation, to seal class recommended,
and method prescribed in SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards - 5th
Edition".
11.3 Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match
shop -fabricated work and accommodate installtion requirements.
11.4 Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid
diagonal runs wherever possible.
11.5 Hold ducts close to walls, overhead costruction, columns and
other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of building.
Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside
of insulation.
11.6 Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork form view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal -
runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.
11.7 Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and
lighting layouts and similar finished work.
11.1 Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct -
plus -insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct.
Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".
11.2 Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories,
dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work
of ductwork system.
12. INSTALLATION OF ABOVE -GRADE DUCT SUPPORTS:
12.1 Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Low Pressure
Duct Standards - 5th Edition" hangers and supports section.
12.2 Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and
anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent
buckling.
12.3 Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and
branches, clinch collar branch connections and the first branch
elbows after nested splits.
12.4 Locate hangers of ducts penetrating wall (or .partitions) as
though the walls will contribute no support to the duct.
12.5 Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-5
12.6 Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than or equal to the
specified maximums.
12.7 Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size
horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install
additional hangers at maximum allowed intervals measured along the
heel lines of the elbows.
12.8 Provide at least one set of hangers for short branches 3 ft or
less in length.
12.9 Locate duct hangers approximately:
2 to 24 inches from flexible connectors
12 to 36 inches from main duct to first hanger of long branch
ducts.
2 to 12 inches from ends of all branch ducts.
2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints.
^� 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are -
the same as specified hanger intervals.
6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by
-- ducts.
12.10 Space hangers approximately:
12.10.1 Ducts with areas up to 4 sq ft may have thier hangers
Spaced up to 8 ft apart.
12.10.2 Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 sq ft may have thier hangers
spaced not more than 6 ft apart.
12.10.3 Ducts with areas over 10 sq ft may have thier hangers
located up to 4 ft apart.
13. INSTALLATION OF DUCT HARDWARE:
13.1 Extractor: Install regulator so that is accessible from ceiling
space. Install regulator opposite specified end bearing(if duct in
�- excess of 8" in width, measured parallel with the regulator rod.
Position regulator so that full range of extractor is available.
Install components air tight.
13.2 Splitter: Install splitter regulator so that full damper
adjustment is possible.
�* 14. INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS AND INLETS:
14.1 General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-6
SECTION 15Q
MATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Furnish and install automatic temperature control systems
specified below and consisting of the following:
1.2 Temperature Control System: This system includes thermostats
supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
1.3 Smoke Control System: This system consists of smoke detectors
and associated relay switches.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 UL Compliance: Provide devices electrical components which have -
been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
2.2 Provide all devices by single manufacturer.
2.3 Supplier to check all specified control elements for
compatability with submitted equipment and shall certify that all
control components will satisfy operational requirements with the
submitted equipment.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, including
installation instructions. -
3.2 Wiring Diagrams: Submit product wiring diagrams clearly
indicating all required field electrical connections, to include
connections between different pieces of equipment.
3.3 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each piece of
equipment.
3.4 Include all above data in maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM:
4.1 Factory -Supplied Thermostats: On unit heater systems, provide
heating -only low -voltage thermostats. Provide Honeywell or approved
equal.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15Q-1
recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended
functions.
14.2 Coordination with other work, including ductwork and.duct
accessories, as necessary to interface installation of outlets and
inlets with other work.
14.3 Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as
indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless
otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling
modules.
r-^ 15. CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
I'll
15.1 Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of
dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances
which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where
ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause
paint deterioration.
15.2 Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to
equipment or air distrubution devices at time of ductwork
installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or
other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until
time connections are to be completed.
END OF SECTION 15P
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15P-7
4.2 Programable Thermostats: On split system, provide Honeywell
T7300 programable thermostat with Q7300 subbase or approved equal.
Prior approval is required to establish equality. Submit
manufacturer's literature in sufficient time to allow review prior
to bid date; phone requests without written literature will not be
considered.
5. SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM:
5.1 This system shall have the capability of sensing smoke at the
furnace and thereupon shutting down the furnace and sounding an
alarm. The system shall consist of smoke detectors and associated
alarm bell. See Section 15770 for information on smoke detector.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSTALLATION OF CONTROL DEVICES:
6.1 Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which control
devices are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until `
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Owner.
6.2 Temperature Control System: Install thermostat on indicated
wall, approximately 60" AFF.
6.3 Smoke Detection System: Install smoke detector as specified in
section 15770. Install alarm bell in mechanical room and label as
"Smoke Detector". Provide silence switch to shutdown alarm bell.
(this switch must NOT shutdown smoke detector.
6.4 Program and Time Clocks: Contractor shall coordinate with
Engineer and Owner to determine the desired operational schedule.
Contractor shall program all programable devices in accordance with
Owner's desired schedule and shall demonstrate the complete
programing sequence to Owner's personnel. Include within the
maintenance manual a type -written copy of the desired control
scheme.
6.5 Test Controls: Test controls and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
6.6 All deficiencies discovered in the course of performance testing
shall be corrected on site, if possible, or the defective
device/component/equipment shall be replaced and a new item
installed. Testing shall resume with equipment repair or
replacement.
END OF SECTION 15P
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 15Q-2
SECTION 16A
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of electrical identification specified in this section
include the following:
Engraved Plastic Signs.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety
standards pertaining to electrical marking and labeling
identification systems.
2.2 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation
of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and
installation instructions for each identification material and
device required. Include data substantiating that materials comply
with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
4.1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories
and types required for each application.
'— 4.2 Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: Provide engraving stock
melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in sizes and
thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter
.., style of sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter
color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical
fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
4.2.1 Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated.
4.2.2 Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except
contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not
penetrate substrate.
r
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16A-1
4.2.3 Provide Seton Style EB or equivalent engraved plastic signs
with normal Gothic style lettering.
4.2.4 Lettering: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other
designations used in electrical identification work with
corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled on
Electrical Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5. APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:
5.1 Install identification after completion of painting.
5.2 Install engraved platic-laminate sign on each major unit of
electrical equipment in building.
5.3 Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2"
high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are
required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching
terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop
drawings.
5.4 Provide signs for each unit of the following:
5.4.1 Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures.
5.4.2 Service disconnect switches.
5.5 Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where
fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate.
END OF SECTION 16A
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16A-2
SECTION 16B
SIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND ME HODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Items discussed includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Raceways.
Conductors.
Boxes and Fittings.
Taps and Splices.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA
standards pertaining to raceways and with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA
Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet boxes,
device boxes, covers and box supports.
2.2 UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety
,-. standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems, wire, cable,
connectors, boxes and fittings and provide all items UL-listed and
labeled.
r-
2.3 NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to
construction and installation of raceway systems, electrical wire,
cable, connectors, boxes and fittings.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including
specifications, installation instructions and general
recommendations, for each device or component required. This
includes raceways, conductors, connectors, boxes, etc.
3.2 Connectors: Submit manufacturer's code scheme for matching
compression connector and die.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:
4.1 General: Provide metal conduit as indicated.
4.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1
4.1.2 Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-1
4.1.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI
C80.3.
4.1.4 EMT Fittings: FS W-F-408. Provide only compression -type
fittings; "set -screw" fittings will not be accepted.
4.1.5 Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, Type 2: Zinc -coated
steel.
4.1.6 Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class
1, and Style A.
4.1.7 Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid -tight
flexible metal conduit; construct of single strip, flexible,
continuous, interlocked, and double -wrapped steel; galvanize
inside and outside; coat with liquid -tight jacket of flexible
polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
4.1.8 Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406,
Type 1, Class 3, Style G. -
5. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:
5.1 General: Provide heavy wall rigid nonmetallic conduit as
manufacturered by Carlon. Provide schedule 40, 90 deg C, U1-listed
PVC.
5.2 Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: ANSI/NEMA TC 6, Type 1
for encased burial in concrete, Type II for direct burial.
5.3 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: ANSI/NEMA TC 9,
match to duct type and material.
6. WIRE AND CABLE:
6.1 General: Provide wire, cable and connectors of manufacturer's
standard materials, as indicated by published product information;
designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as
required for the installation.
6.2 Provide factory -fabricated wire of sizes, ratings, materials and
types indicated for each service.
6.2.1 UL Type: THHN.
6.2.2 UL Type: THW.
6.2.3 Material: Copper.
6.2.4 Conductors: Solid (AWG 20 to AWG 8 only).
6.2.5 Conductors: Concentric -lay -stranded (standard
flexibility).
6.2.6 Outer Covering: Thermoplastic.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-2
7. CONNECTORS:
7.1 Provide UL-listed and labeled components and devices.
7.2 Crimp -Type Compression Connectors (all copper conductors. No. 8
AWG and larger): Provide high conductivity copper crimp -type; Ilsco
"CT" series for straight splices or "AH" series for tap splices, or
approved equal. Comply with UL486. Provide color -coded between
connector and die.
7.3 Twist -On Connectors (all copper conductors no. 18 thru no. 10
AWG): Provide twist -on wire joints at outlet box taps, Thomas &
Betts series "PT" or approved equal.
7.4 Heat Shrinkable Tubing: Provide heavy-duty protective covering,
rated for 600 volts, 90 deg C, designed for 3:1 shrink ratio.
Provide Steel City type "HS" or approved equal.
8. FABRICATED BOXES:
8.1 Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet
steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes,
including box depths, to suit each respective location and
installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides,
and with threaded screw holes with corrosion -resistant screws for
securing box covers and wiring devices.
8.1.1 Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box
accessories as required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs,
cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which
are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling
requirments of individual wiring situations. Choice of
accessories is Installer's option.
8.2 Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet
steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types,
shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation;
with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts,
screws and washers.
8.3 Conduit Outlet Bodies and Cast Device Boxes: Provide galvanized
cast -metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit
respective locations and installation, construct with threaded -
conduit -entrance ends, removable covers, cover gaskets, and
corrosion -resistant screws. Provide Appleton or approved equal.
8.4 Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -
resistant punched -steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and
malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connector, of types and
sizes to suit respective uses and installation.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
9. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS:
9.1 Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC
and NECA "Standard of Installation", and complying with recognized
industry practices.
9.2 All conduit shall be run in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
When requested by the Owner or Engineer, a complete conduit system
layout shall be submitted for approval for each floor or section
under construction before permanent support or location is made.
9.3 All conduit shall be installed as a complete system without
wires and shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting
to fitting. A run of conduit from between outlet and outlet or
between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the
equivalent of four 90 deg bends, including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting.
9.4 No feeder conduit shall be longer than 80 feet between junction
boxes or cabinets unless there are no direction changes and only a
straight in -line pull of wire is required. In such straight -in -line
runs the distance between cabinets or boxes may be increased to 100
feet.
9.5 Coat underfloor metal raceways with bitumastic type protective
coating prior to placing concrete.
9.6 Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting
installation of cables/wires within raceways.
9.7 Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide only above suspended ceilings
and only for lighting fixture "whips". All other applications use
liquid -tight flexible metal conduit.
9.8 Liquid -tight flexible conduit: Provide for motor connections,
and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to
movement and vibration.
9.9 Below -Grade Conduit: No less than 3'-0" prior to penetrating
floor slab, change underfloor conduit to EMT or rigid steel conduit.
Provide concrete -tight fittings and coat conduit as specified in'
this section.
9.10 Conduit Used as "Ground" Path: This electrical installation
shall consist of a complete "green -wire" ground system, i.e. each
electrical device shall be grounded with a seperate ground wire and
shall not rely on the conduit system for ground path. This in no way
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-4
F-
release the Contractor from complying with NEC requirements to
install all conduits completely grounded.
9.11 Minimum Conduit Size: The minimum conduit size acceptable on
this project is 3/4" unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
10. SPECIAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS:
10.1 Telephone Conduit:
10.1.1 General: Provide all telephone conduit with pull wire.
10.1.2 Non -Shutdown Aspect of Project: Contractor shall
coordinate with telephone company, Owner, telephone contractor,
etc. to ensure that phone service is not disconnect for any
extended period of time (nothing in excess of 8 hours).
10.1.3 Telephone Outlet Conduit: Provide 3/4" EMT conduit for
indicated conduit runs. Extend from telephone outlet
�. location(consisting of standard receptacle j-box located 12"
A.F.F.) to ceiling space.
10.1.4 Telephone Service Conduit: Remove existing weatherhead and
install 18"x18"x6" junction box at old weatherhead location for
making connections. Extend new 2" conduit from existing
weatherhead location down along existing wall, then below grade
until outside the building slab (minimum of 6"). The replacement
telephone service will be routed up to this conduit (direct -
buried) and then into building. Owner will arrange for all
�-. telephone cabling to be done outside this contract.
10.2 HVAC Control Conduit:
10.2.1 General: All HVAC control conduit shall be run in EMT
conduit, unless specifically stated otherwise. No exposed wiring
shall be allowed.
NOTE: All control devices may not be shown on both the
"mechancial" and "electrical" drawings. See Section 15000,
paragraph titled "Mechanical -Electrical Coordination".
Review all drawings and/or specification sections for
information on control requirements PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID.
10.2.2 Thermostat Conduit: Provide standard junction box (60"
AFF, typical) and 3/4" EMT conduit from thermostat location to
controlled equipment.
10.3 Electrical Service Conduits:
10.3.1 Non -Shutdown of Building: This building is critical to the
City's on -going operations, therefore the Contractor shall
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-5
coordinate with Owner, LP&L, Architect, etc. as necessary to
ensure that the power outage is limited to non -business hours,
and for no period to exceed 4 hours.
10.3.2 Provide rigid steel conduits above -grade.
11. General: Revise the existing electric service to the building by
installing a new service disconnect at the meter location, adjacent
service disconnects for the two new panels.
12. Fabricated Framework: Provide fabricated framework to support the
new services disconnects as shown on the drawings. Position this
framework so as to allow the construction to continue after this
service has been installed.
12.1.1 Elecrtic Service: Install fabricated framework and
position service disconnects on framework. Route new service
conductors from power pole underground to framework, then in
weatherproof gutter. Tap individual feeders for each disconnects
on to service disconnects so as to comply with "10 foot tap rule`
of NEC. Provide Ilsco type "GTT" t-tap connector with factory -
supplied insultating cover. No alternatives with prior approval.
12.1.2 Connection to Service for Existing Portion of Building:
Remove existing weatherhead and meter box. Provide 18"x18"x6"
lockable junction box at location of original meter box. Extend
new service conductors from new junction box to fabricated
framework supporting service disconnects. Connect to appropiate
service disconnect switch. Accomplish this portion of the work at
the beginning of the project so as to minimize the disruption of
power to the building.
13. INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE:
13.1 General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as
indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
13.2 Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical
raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper
interface.
13.3 Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed
in a raceway.
13.4 Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
13.5 Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which
cannot damage raceway.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-6
13.6 Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces
or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where
possible.
13.7 Keep conductor splices to minimum.
13.8 Install splices and tapes which have mechanical strength and
insulation rating equivalent -or -better than conductor.
13.9 Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with
conductor material.
13.10 Color Coding: Provide conductors with colored insulation
complying with the following schedule:
^" 13.10.1 120/240V System:
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Orange(high leg)
.- Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White or Gray.
Ground:Green.
Switch Leg: Black w/ White, Blue w/ White.
13.10.2 ALL SERVICE, FEEDER AND BRANCH CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SO
CODED.
13.10.3 All wiring No. 8 and larger shall be black and shall be
marked with color banding tape as specified. All phase
conductors, neutral and equipment ground conductors shall each be
marked with colored tape. This tape marking shall be applied at
the breakers, mains, and in all wireway, pullbox, auxillary
gutter, junction box, motor terminal box and transformer
enclosure. In wireways and auxillary gutters longer than two
feet, install tape marking every four feet of wiring in the
raceway.
13.11 Wiring Sizing: No conductor snaller than #12 shall be used. In
the case of #12 "home runs" over 75 feet in length resize in
accordance with the following:
A. 75 to 125 feet: #10 AWG.
B. 125 feet +: #8 AWG.
13.11.1 The sizing of all wire except remote control wire shall
be accomplished in the case of both feeder and branch circuits by
conforming to the following provisions:
A. 120/208V: 2.0% at max load with 90% power factor.
14. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-7
14.1 Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors
of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.
15. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
15.1 Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of
circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when
detected.
15.2 Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
16. APPLICATION:
16.1 Conduit:
16.1.1 Rigid Steel: Provide for all building service wiring, all
roof -mounted conduit and/or where abuse might be expected.
16.1.2 EMT: Provide for all building feeder and branch circuits. --
16.1.3 Non -Metallic Conduit: Provide for all below -grade conduit,
unless noted otherwise.
16.2 Conductors:
16.2.1 THW: Provide for all feeder circuits and otherwise as
required by NEC due to site conditions.
16.2.2 THHN: Provide for all branch circuitry, except where
restricted by NEC.
END OF SECTION 16B
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16B-8
SECTION 16C
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the
following:
Receptacles.
Switches.
Wall plates.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction
and installation of electrical wiring devices.
2.2 UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices
which have been UL-listed and labeled.
2.3 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and
�- specific -purpose wiring devices.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring
devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
4.1 General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types,
colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and
complying with NEMA Stds Pub No. WD 1. Where types and grades are
not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer
to fulfill wiring requirements, and complying with NEC and NEMA
standards for wiring devices.
4.2 Receptacles:
4.2.1 Specification -Grade Duplex or Simplex: Provide duplex or
simplex specification -grade type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire
grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground
terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20-
amperes, 125 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring NEMA
configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Provide all nylon
face and bodies, flat face with body color -coded for rating.
WIRING DEVICES 16C-1
Provide Leviton "Spec Master" model 5362 (duplex) and model 5361
(simplex) with limited ten-year warranty or approved equal.
4.2.2 Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter Duplex: Provide duplex
receptacle having feed-thru and terminal cpaibilities to
interrupt the circuit when a fault to ground exceeds the
predetermined limit. Comply with UL 943, class A. Provide UL
listed as "Hospital -Grade". Provide with all nylon designer -style
faces, indicator light (showing the circuit is powered) and test
switch. Provide Leviton GFCI or approved equal.
4.3 Switches:
4.3.1 Snap: Provide specification -grade flush single and double -
pole two, three and four way, toggle or key switches, 20- or 30-
ampere, 125/277-volt AC, quiet operation, green grounding screw,
with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster
ears, switch handle, and back or side -wired screw terminals.
Provide with urea molded parts, color coded for rating. Provide
Leviton "Spec Master" with ten limited warranty, model 1221 or -
approved equal.
5. WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
5.1 Lighting and Power Wall Plates: Provide single -switch, duplex,
or simplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices, of types, sizes,
and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Construct with metal
screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match
finish of plates. Provide wall plates possessing the following
additional construction feature:
5.1.1 Material and Finish: 0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished
stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:
6.1 Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with
Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirments of NEC
and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
6.2 Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box
and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring
devices with other work.
6.3 Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean
and free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
WIRING DEVICES 16C-2
6.4 Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is
completed.
6.5 Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is
completed.
r- 7. PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
7.1 Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise
Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets.
At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have
been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
8. GROUNDING:
8.1 Provide electrically -continuous, tight grounding connections for
wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.
9. TESTING:
9.1 Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for
electrical continuity and proper polarity connections. After
energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance
with requirements.
END OF SECTION 16C
WIRING DEVICES 16C-3
SECTION 16D
POWER DISIRIBU[ION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of power distribution components specified in this section
include the following:
Panelboards.
Overcurrent Protective Devices.
Service Entrance Equipment.
Grounding Devices.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 Special Use -Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for
special use, with UL marks indicating that special type usage.
2.2 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards
pertaining to panelboards and accessories, and enclosures; provide
units which have been UL-listed and labeled.
2.3 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation
of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes.
2.4 NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Std. Pub. No. 250,
"Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum)", Pub. No.
1, "Panelboards", and installation portion of Pub. No. PB 1.1,
"Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less".
2.5 UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489,
"Molded -Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures".
Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL-listed and
labeled.
2.6 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA
Std Pub Nos. AB 1, AB 2 and SG 3 pertaining to molded -case and low -
voltage power type circuit breakers.
2.7 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction
and installation of service -entrance equipment and accessories.
2.8 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA
standards pertaining to electrical service entrances.
2.9 UL Compliance Comply with applicable requirements of UL
standards pertaining to service entrances. Provide service- entrance
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-1
equipment and accessories which are UL-listed and labeled, and
equipment marked, "Suitable for use as Service Equipment".
2.10 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical
grounding and ground -fault protection systems.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including
�- specifications, installation instructions and general
recommendations, for each type of panelboard required.
3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards. and
enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and
required individual panelboard devices, including but not
necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses,
ground -fault circuit interrupters, and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS:
4.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards,
enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings
indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials,
design and construction in accordance with published product
information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as
required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings
are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry
,., standards for applications indicated.
4.2 Interiors:
4.2.1 All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They
shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be
replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing
the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without
machining, drilling or tapping.
4.2.2 Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row
construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A
nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings.
4.2.3 Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars
shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole
branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch
circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for
each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A ground
bus will be included in all panels.
4.3 Boxes:
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-2
4.3.1 Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized
steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with National
Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a
panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical
equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional
required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs
with adjustable nuts shall be provided.
A. No "load centers" will be accepted.
4.4 Trim:
4.4.1 Switching device handles shall be accessible. Doors and
panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall
have flush type cylinder lock and catch except doors over 48
inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners top and bottom of
door in addition to the flush type cylinder lock and catch.
Panelboard switching devices with individual dead front doors
shall be acceptable in lieu of standard door in trim design. -
4.5 Panelboard trim clamps shall be of the indicating type.
4.5.1 Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed
alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall
be furnished with each door.
4.5.2 The panelboard front shall provide door -and -door
construction consisting of hinged inner dead -front shield and a
formed door over the entire panelboard. The front shall be tamper
resistant and shall not be removable with the door locked.
4.5.3 All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall
be properly cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting phosphatized
coating, and finished with a gray ANSI 61 paint. After
installation, trim clamps shall not be accessible when the panel
door is closed and locked.
4.6 Conductors:
4.6.1 All main bus bars shall be copper or aluminum, sized in
accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any
current carrying part to a maximum of 50 deg. C above an ambient
temperature of 40 deg. C maximum.]
4.7 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards:
4.7.1 Panels where shown for use at 240
listed with integrated assembly rating
Square D, type NQOD or approved equal.
volts maximum shall be UL
of 22K*A.I.C. and shall be
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-3
5. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
5.1 Molded -Case Circuit Breakers:
5.1.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit
breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and
electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with
manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and
construction in accordance with published product information,
and as required for a complete installation.
5.1.2 Provide factory -assembled, molded -case circuit breakers
ampere ratings as specified, 250-volts, 60 HZ. Provide breakers
with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each
pole. Construct with overcenter, trip -free, toggle type operating
mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action and positive
handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and
operating in any physical position and in an ambient temperature
of 40 deg. C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type
removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.4
5.2 Fuses:
'^ 5.2.1 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of
types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let -
through current characteristics indicated, which comply with
•-- manufacturer's standard design, material, and contruction in
accordance with published product information, and with industry
standards and configurations.
5.2.2 Class RK1 and Class J Current -Limiting Fuses: Provide UL
Class R1 and Class J current -limiting fuses rated 250 V, 60 Hz,
200 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current
rating.
6. SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT:
6.1 General: Provide service -entrance equipment and accessories; of
types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated,
which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and
construction in accordance with published product information, and
as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified.
6.2 Switches: Provide safety switches complying with Division-16
section "Motor and Circuit Disconnects", in accordance with the
following listing:
6.2.1 General -Duty Safety Switches, provide with NEMA type 3R
enclosures.
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-4
6.3 Raceways: Provide raceways complying with Division-16 Basic
Materials and Methods section "Raceways", in accordance with the
following listing:
6.3.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, and fittings.
7. GROUNDING SYSTEMS:
7.1 General: Provide each electrical grounding system indicated,
with assembly ofmaterialsincluding, but not necessarily limited
to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless legs), grounding
rods/electrodes and plate needed for complete installation.
7.2 Provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding
connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized
according to NEC.
7.3 Ground Rod Tap Connectors: Provide UL467 listed, prefilled with
Penetrox compound, Burndy YGHR-C or approved equal.
7.4 Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10'..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
8. INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS:
8.1 General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated in
accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
8.2 Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable
and raceway installation work.
8.3 Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces,
ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure.
8.4 Provide electrical connections within enclosures.
8.5 Fill out panelboards' circuit directory cards upon completion of
installation work. Only type -written circuit directories will be
accepted.
8.6 Connect circuitry within panelboard in the same order as shown
on the panel schedule.
9. INSTALLATION OF SERVICE -ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT:
9.1 Install service -entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-5
recognized industry practices, to ensure that service -entrance
equipment fulfills requirements. Comply with applicable
-- installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards.
9.2 Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company
wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service -entrance
equipment work with other work.
10. INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
10.1 Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with
recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices
comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for
installation of overcurrent protective devices.
10.2 Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work,
as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective
devices with other work.
10.3 Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting
or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling.
11. GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION:
11.1 Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with
r- manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
practices. Comply with requirements of NEC, NECA and NEMA standards
for installation of grounding and ground -fault protection systems
and devices.
11.2 Install clamp -on -connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal
contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit
integrity.
11.3 Ground Rod: Coordinate location with Atchitect and Engineer
prior to installation. Provide ground electrode conductor from
service entrance to grounding connector and attach using ground rod
tap connector. Use only factory -supplied crimping device to ensure
correct crimp.
11.4 Notify Engineer of grounding device installation no less than
fourty-eight hours prior to concrete pour, so that installation may
be inspected.
11.5 Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding system,
test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests
show resistance -to -ground is over 20 ohms, take appropriate action
to reduce resistance to 20 ohms or less by driving additional ground
rt rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rods with
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-6
sodium chloride, calcium chloride, copper sulphate, or magnesium.
Then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION 16D
POWER DISTRIBUTION 16D-7
SECTION 16E
.�MOTORAN NCS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of motor and circuit disconnect devices specified in this
section include the following:
Disconnect Switches.
Motor Starters.
Receptacle and Plug "Disconnects".
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
-- 2.1 UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide devices which have been UL-
listed and labeled.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including
specifications, installation instructions and general
recommendations, for each device required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
4.1 General -Duty Disconnect Switches: Provide surface -mounted,
general -duty type, sheet -steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes,
and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 volts, 60 hertz,
with number of poles and blades and amp rating as specified for each
application; incorporating spring assisted, quick -make, quick -break
switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in
OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is
integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily
recognizable, and is capable of being padlocked in OFF position.
Construct current carrying parts of high -conductivity copper, with
silver -tungsten type switch contacts, and stamped enclosure
knockouts. Provide NEMA 1 or 3R type enclosure as required for each
application.
" 5. MOTOR STARTERS:
5.1 General: Provide motor starters and ancillary components; which
comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and
construction in accordance with published product. information, and
as required for complete installation.
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16E-1
5.3 AC Manual Starters: Provide single-, two-, or three-pole(as
appropiate) manual motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical
characteristics indicated; equip with thermal overload relay with
field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10% variation of
nominal overload heater rating(overload protection at motor.starter
may be omitted if motors have built-in protection). Provide starters
with quick -make, quick -break trip free toggle mechanisms, green
pilot lights, and with toggle operated handle with handle lock -off;
mount starter in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure. Provide low -
voltage protection which shall open the circuit should a power
failure occur, and will not reclose without manual operation.
9. RECEPTACLE AND PLUG "DISCONNECTS":
9.1 Provide 20A receptacle and plug for disconnecting specified
devices with 1/4 HP motors and smaller.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
10. INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
10.1 Install disconnect switches where indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NEMA and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
10.2 Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation
work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper
interface.
10.3 Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven appliances,
and motors and controllers within sight of controller position
unless otherwise indicated.
11. INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:
11.1 Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
11.2 Coordinate with other work including motor and elecrical
wiring/ cabeling work, as necessary to interface installation of
motor starters with other work.
11.3 Label manual motor starters with titles as shown on the
drawings. Provide engraved cover plate (for manual motor starters).
15. INSTALLATION OF PLUG & RECEPTACLE DISCONNECTS:
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16E-2
15.1 Locate receptacle within 12" of motor -driven device and provide
no more than 18" power cord.
15.2 Provide for designated motors only, and only when motor is 1/4
hp or smaller.
16. APPLICATION:
16.1 Disconnects:
16.1.1 Provide 60A/2P general -duty fused circuit disconnects as
shown at condensing unit.
16.1.2 Provide 10OA/2P general -duty fused disconnects with 100A
fuses for service entrances. Label as such.
16.3 Manual Motor Starters:
16.3.4 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for all unit heater.
Position in j-box, attach to unit heater housing.]
16.3.5 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for furnace and coils.
16.3.6 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for all wall -mounted
exhaust fans. These switches will be used for both local control
of the exhaust fan and also for isolation of the fan motor for
maintenance.
16.3.6 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for explosion -proof
exhaust fans. Install in explosion -proof switch cover. This
switch will be used for both local control of the exhaust fan.
Provide similar switch at the exhaust fan itself for isolation of
^� the fan motor for maintenance.
16.3.6 Provide 30A/1P general -duty switch for explosion -proof in -
line supply fans. Install in explosion -proof switch cover. This
switch will be used for local control of the in -line fan. Provide
similar switch at the fan itself for isolation of the fan motor
for maintenance.
16.5 Receptacle & Plug:
-- 16.5.1 Provide for all ceiling -mounted exhaust fans.
END OF SECTION 16E
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16E-3
SECTION 16F
BUILDING LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.1 Types of lighting fixtures in the section include the following:
Fluorescent.
Incandescent.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2.1 NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation
and construction of building lighting fixtures.
2.2 NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA
Std Pub Nos. LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment.
2.3 ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to
lighting fixtures.
2.4 UL Compliance: Provide interior lighting fixtures which have
been UL-listed and labeled.
2.5 CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which comply with
Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the
CBM label.
3. SUBMITTALS:
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting fixtures.
3.2 Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with
separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type"
alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly
indicated on each sheet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4. LIGHTING FIXTURES:
4.1 General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings
indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings,
lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring.
4.2 Fluorescent -Lamp Ballasts: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts,
capable of operating lamp types indicated; with high power factor,
rapid -start, and low -noise features; Type 1; Class P; sound -rated A,
and with internal thermal protection.
BUILDING LIGHTING 16F-1
4.3 Emergency Ballasts: Provide equal to Bodine. Install in fixture
�.. or have provided from factory. Arrange so that ballast has
capability of operating one 40W lamp for no less than 1 1/2 hr.
Provide with integral charger.
5. LIGHTING FIXTURES:
5.1 "FA": Spec grade recessed troffer. Provide with opposing,
rotary -action cam latches; door from hinged or latched from either
side; frame corners screwed together; gasket between door and frame;
hinged and latched wireway; pressure -lock lampholders; regressed
aluminum frame.
Manufacturer: Lithonia
Catalog Number: 2SP-240-rw-al2.125-120
Watts: 10OW
Lamps: 2-F40RST12CW
Mounting: T-Bar
5.2 "IE": Spec grade explosion -proof (Class 1, Division 1, Group C) _
light -fixture. Provide with porcelain enameled steel reflector.
Manufacturer: Appleton
Catalog Number: A-51 series, #AC1575
Watts: 150W
Lamps: 150A-23
Mounting: Surface -Mounted
5.3 "XA" Emergency power pack 6-volt exit light. Provide with heavy
duty standard long -life maintenance -free sealed lead -calcium battery
power pack (capable of operation for a minimum of 1 1/2 hr); two -
additional sealed beam heads mounted on side of exit light; buzzer
and flasher accessories; black housing. The two additional heads
shall be 9 watt sealed beam halogen heads.
Manufacturer: Sure -light
Catalog Number: EPH-R-I-B-SL(#29-14)
Watts: 50W
Lamps: integral
Mounting: Wall
Heads: 9 watt halogen
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6. INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES:
6.1 Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated,
in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation",
NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure
that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
BUILDING LIGHTING 16F-2
6.2 Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly
interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other
work.
6.3 Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural support.; and
check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb.
6.4 Emergency Ballasts: Provide factory -installed "emergency
ballasts" where possible. Provide wiring arrangement so that
lights(with emergency ballasts)shown to be switched will activate
ballast only during actual power outage.
6.5 Install light fixtures in hazardous areas in accordance with
NEC.
7. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
7.1 Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of
installation.
7.2 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of
construction period.
8. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
8.1 Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after
building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to
demonstrate operation. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units
at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove
and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
9. PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
9.1 At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior
lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after
Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer.
9.2 Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15% (but not
less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in
each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's
storage space.
10. GROUNDING:
10.1 Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each interior
lighting fixture installation where indicated.
END OF SECTION 16F
BUILDING LIGHTING 16F-3
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
-43-
(This page left blank intentionally)
r-�
TO:
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the _day of
198_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for:
as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock;
it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that
said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of - 198_ at
the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, cer-
tificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the con-
tract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents
within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice.
The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of
such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to
execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be re-
tained by the City of Lubbock.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Owner's Representative
-44-
(This page left blank intentionally)
MAP IN FILE
SEE
RESOLUTION
Page is too large to OCR.
Page is too large to OCR.
Page is too large to OCR.
Page is too large to OCR.
Page is too large to OCR.